FOREWORD

Thank you for purchasing HD30 series vector control inverter manufactured by
Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.

This User Manual describes how to use HD30 series inverters and their installation
wiring, parameter setting, troubleshooting and daily maintenance etc. Before using
the product, please read through this User Manual carefully. In addition, please do
not use this product until you have fully understood safety precautions.

Note:
 Preserve this Manual for future use.
 If you need the User Manual due to damage, loss or other reasons, please contact
the regional distributor of our company or directly contact our company Technical
Service Center.
 If you still have some problems during use, please contact our company Technical
Service Center.
 Due to product upgrade or specification change, and for the purpose of
improving convenience and accuracy of this manual, this manual’s contents may
be modified.
 Email address: [email protected]
Connection with peripheral devices

Three-phase AC power supply

MCCB

Contactor

AC input reactor
(accessory)

EMI filter

Braking resistor
(accessory)

HD30 DC reactor
(accessory)

EMI filter

AC output reactor
(accessory)

Motor
 Quick Start for HD30 Operation
Note:
Some parameters have been set (factory setting) so that you could not set for the initial use.

1. Set the motor rating parameter correctly

Power on, use keypad to set the following parameters, motor parameters refer to motor nameplate.
Ref. Code Function Ref. Code Function
F08.00 Rated power of motor 1 F08.03 Rated frequency of motor 1
F08.01 Rated voltage of motor 1 F08.04 Rated RPM of motor 1
F08.02 Rated current of motor 1

2. Control the start/stop and set the running frequency via using the keypad
1. Power on. Using the keypad can set motor parameters (see the motor nameplate parameter),
running frequency and Acc. / Dec. time. See the following table.
Ref. Code Function Setting Meaning
F00.10 Frequency setting source selection 0 (factory setting) Set by keypad
F00.11 Command setting source selection 0 (factory setting) Keypad running command channel
Running frequency, adjust according
F00.13 Starting frequency digital setting -
to actual requirement
Acc. time, adjust according to actual
F03.01 Acc. time 1 -
requirement
Dec. time, adjust according to actual
F03.02 Dec. time 1 -
requirement

2. Pressing panel’s key can start the inverter, pressing / button increase / decrease set
frequency, and pressing key can stop the inverter outputting.
3. Control the start/stop via terminals and set the running frequency via keypad
1. The terminal DI1 is forward running signal input, and DI2 is reverse running signal input, their
wirings are as following figure.

K1 Output indicating
Forward DO1
DI1 signal at running
K2 R1C
Reverse
DI2
R1B
Fault indicating
COM
R1A

2. After power on, set the functional parameters in accordance with wirings, as following table.
Ref. Code Function Setting Meaning
F00.10 Frequency setting source selection 0 (factory setting) Set by keypad
F00.11 Command setting source selection 1 Terminal running command source
Running frequency, adjust according
F00.13 Starting frequency digital setting -
to actual requirement
Acc. time, adjust according to actual
F03.01 Acc. time 1 -
requirement
Dec. time, adjust according to actual
F03.02 Dec. time 1 -
requirement
Forward running function (terminal
F15.00 DI1 function 2 (factory setting)
forward signal input)
Rervese running function (terminal
F15.01 DI2 function 3 (factory setting)
rervese signal input)

3. When the K1 is closed in the wiring diagram, the motor is running forward; when K1 is turned off,
the motor stops running. When the K2 is closed, the motor is running reverse; when K2 is turned off,
the motor stops running. K1, K2 are closed or disconnected at the same time, the motor stop running.
You can increase / decrease the set frequency by changing F00.13 or pressing the / key on the
control keypad.
Close the K1 of the wiring diagram, the motor will run forward; close K2, run reverse; simultaneously
close or disconnect, the motor will stop.
4. Control the start/stop via terminals and set the running frequency via analogue
1. The terminal DI1 is forward running signal input, and DI2 is reverse running signal input, their
wirings are as following figure.

K1
Forward
DI1
K2 DO1 Output indicating
Reverse DI2 signal at running
COM R1C
+10 R1B
Analogue input AI1 Fault indicating
R1A
GND

2. After power on, set the functional parameters in accordance with wirings, as following table.
Ref. Code Function Setting Meaning
F00.10 Frequency setting source selection 3 Analogue setting
F00.11 Command setting source selection 1 Terminal running command source
Acc. time, adjust according to actual
F03.01 Acc. time 1 -
requirement
Dec. time, adjust according to actual
F03.02 Dec. time 1 -
requirement
Forward running function (terminal
F15.00 DI1 function 2 (factory setting)
forward signal input)
Rervese running function (terminal
F15.01 DI2 function 3 (factory setting)
rervese signal input)
F16.01 AI1 function 2 (factory setting) Frequency setting source (set by AI1)

3. Set the running frequency by adjusting AI1 analogue input.

4. When the K1 is closed in the wiring diagram, the motor is running forward; when K1 is turned off,
the motor stops running. When the K2 is closed, the motor is running reverse; when K2 is turned off,
the motor stops running. K1, K2 are closed or disconnected at the same time, the motor stop.
5. Control the start/stop via terminals and set the running frequency via communication
1. The terminal DI1 is forward running signal input, and DI2 is reverse running signal input, their
wirings are as following figure.

K1
Forward Output indicating
DI1 DO1
K2 signal at running
Reverse DI2
R1C
COM
R1B
MODBUS Fault indicating
R1A

2. After power on, set the functional parameters in accordance with wirings, as following table.
Ref. Code Function Setting Meaning
F00.10 Frequency setting source selection 2 SCI communication setting
F00.11 Command setting source selection 1 Terminal running command source
Acc. time, adjust according to actual
F03.01 Acc. time 1 -
requirement
Dec. time, adjust according to actual
F03.02 Dec. time 1 -
requirement
Forward running function (terminal
F15.00 DI1 function 2 (factory setting)
forward signal input)
Rervese running function (terminal
F15.01 DI2 function 3 (factory setting)
rervese signal input)
F15.18 DO1 function 2 (factory setting) Inverter is running
F17.00 Data format 0 (factory setting) 1-8-2 format, no parity, RTU
F17.01 Baud rate 3 (factory setting) 9600bps
F17.02 Local address 2 (factory setting)

3. Close the K1 of the wiring diagram, the motor will run forward; close K2, run reverse; simultaneously
close or disconnect, the motor will stop.
4. Modify the running frequency via SCI communication function code 0X06 writing register 0x3201.
Such as: modify the local address two of slave with running frequency of 45.00Hz, as following table.
Command Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x01 0x11 0x94 0xDB 0x7E
Response Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x01 0x11 0x94 0xDB 0x7E
6. Control the start/stop and set the running frequency via using communication
1. The communication wirings are as following figure.

Output indicating
DO1
signal at running
MODBUS R1C

R1B
Fault indicating
R1A

2. After power on, set the functional parameters in accordance with wirings, as following table.
Ref. Code Function Setting Meaning
F00.10 Frequency setting source selection 2 SCI communication setting
SCI communication running
F00.11 Command setting source selection 2
command source
Acc. time, adjust according to actual
F03.01 Acc. time 1 -
requirement
Dec. time, adjust according to actual
F03.02 Dec. time 1 -
requirement
F17.00 Data format 0 (factory setting) 1-8-2 format, no parity, RTU
F17.01 Baud rate 3 (factory setting) 9600bps
F17.02 Local address 2 (factory setting)

3. Start and stop the local address 2 of inverter via SCI communication function code 0x06 writing
register 0x3200, such as forward start command, as following table.
Command Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x01 0x4B 0x41
Response Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x01 0x4B 0x41

Dec. stops command, as following table.

Command Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x04 0x8B 0x42
Response Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x04 0x8B 0x42

4. Modify the running frequency via SCI communication function code 0X06 writing register 0x3201.
Such as: modify the local address two of slave with running frequency of 45.00Hz, as following table.
Command Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x01 0x11 0x94 0xDB 0x7E
Response Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x01 0x11 0x94 0xDB 0x7E
7. Motor parameter auto-tuning
1. Motor parameter auto-tuning can be only done in keypad mode.
2. Correct wiring.
3. Power on, set motor parameter (F08.00 - F08.04) by keypad.
4. Parameter auto-tuning, available auto-tuning methods for different control mode are shown as
below table.
Control Mode Auto-tuning Method (Recommanded)
Manual torque boost Automatic torque boost
V/f control
Use static, rotary, stator resistance self-tuning Use still, rotate self-tuning
Vector control Use Rotation Auto Tuning

Static self-tuning:
F08.06 = 1 (static auto-tuning), press key to the stop parameter display state, press key to
start the auto-tuning. Auto-refresh F08.07 - F08.09 after auto-tuning.
Ref. Code Function Ref. Code Function
F08.07 Motor 1 Stator resistance F08.09 Motor 1 Leakage inductance
F08.08 Motor 1 rotor resistance

Rotation Auto-Tuning:
Before turning the auto-tuning, first disconnect the motor from the load.
Then set F08.06 = 2 (Rotate Auto Tuning), press key to go to the stop parameter display state,
press key to start auto tuning.
In the motor rotation process, there may be shock or even overcurrent, this time should immediately
press key to stop the parameter tuning, and adjust the Acc. and Dec. time and F09.15, F09.16
(suppression shock coefficient) to mitigate possible shocks.
After auto tuning, auto refresh F08.04, F08.07 - F08.16.
Ref. Code Function Ref. Code Function
F08.04 Motor 1 rated Rpm F08.12 Motor 1 Core saturation coefficient 1
F08.07 Motor 1stator resistance F08.13 Motor 1 Core saturation coefficient 2
F08.08 Motor 1rotor resistance F08.14 Motor 1 Core saturation coefficient 3
F08.09 Motor 1 leakage inductance F08.15 Motor 1 Core saturation coefficient 4
F08.10 Motor 1 Mutual resistance F08.16 Motor 1 Core saturation coefficient 5
F08.11 Motor 1 No-load excitation current

Stator resistance measurement:

F08.06 = 3 (only measuring stator resistance), press key to stop the shutdown parameter display
state, press key to start the auto-tuning.
After auto tuning is complete, F08.07 is refreshed automatically.
Ref. Code Function Ref. Code Function
F08.07 Motor 1stator resistance
 CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions .................................................................................................... 1 
1.1 Safety Definition ............................................................................................................................... 1 
1.2 About Motor and Load ..................................................................................................................... 1 
1.3 About HD30 ....................................................................................................................................... 2 

Chapter 2 Product Information ............................................................................................................................... 5 

2.1 Model .................................................................................................................................................. 5 
2.2 Nameplate .......................................................................................................................................... 5 
2.3 Rated Value ........................................................................................................................................ 6 
2.4 Technical Data ................................................................................................................................... 7 
2.5 Parts of Inverter............................................................................................................................... 10 

Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation ........................................................................................................................ 11 

3.1 Precautions ...................................................................................................................................... 11 
3.2 Installation Site Requirement ....................................................................................................... 11 
3.3 Installation Direction and Space Requirements ........................................................................ 12 
3.4 Dimensions and Weight ................................................................................................................. 13 
3.5 Install and Dismantle Keypad ....................................................................................................... 15 
3.6 Dismantle Plastic Cover ................................................................................................................. 16 

Chapter 4 Electrical Installation ............................................................................................................................ 17 

4.1 Wiring Precautions.......................................................................................................................... 17 
4.2 Peripheral Accessories Selection .................................................................................................. 17 
4.2.1 Wiring specifications of input and output......................................................................................... 17 
4.2.2 Power terminal lug .................................................................................................................................... 19 
4.3 Main Circuit Terminals and Wiring ............................................................................................... 20 
4.3.1 Supply and Motor Terminal .................................................................................................................... 20 
4.3.2 Power Terminal Wiring.............................................................................................................................. 21 
4.4 Control Board .................................................................................................................................. 23 
4.4.1 Control Board Terminal ............................................................................................................................ 23 
4.4.2 Jumper ........................................................................................................................................................... 25 
4.4.3 Communication Terminal ........................................................................................................................ 25 
4.4.4 Control Terminal Wiring ........................................................................................................................... 26 
4.5 Meet EMC Requirement of Installation ....................................................................................... 29 
4.5.1 Correct EMC Installation .......................................................................................................................... 29 
4.5.2 Wiring Requirement .................................................................................................................................. 30 
4.5.3 Motor Connection...................................................................................................................................... 30 
 4.5.4 Ground Connection................................................................................................................................... 31 
4.5.5 EMI Filter ........................................................................................................................................................ 31 
4.5.6 Countermeasures for Conduction, Radiation and Radio Frequency Interference .............. 32 
4.5.7 Reactor ........................................................................................................................................................... 32 

Chapter 5 Operation Instructions ......................................................................................................................... 33 

5.1 Function Description ...................................................................................................................... 33 
5.1.1 Operation Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 33 
5.1.2 Inverter Frequency Setting Source ...................................................................................................... 33 
5.1.3 Inverter Status ............................................................................................................................................. 34 
5.1.4 Inverter Running Mode ............................................................................................................................ 34 
5.2 Operating Instructions ................................................................................................................... 35 
5.2.1 Keypad ........................................................................................................................................................... 35 
5.2.2 Display Status .............................................................................................................................................. 36 
5.2.3 Keypad Operation Examples .................................................................................................................. 38 
5.3 Initial Power On ............................................................................................................................... 42 

Chapter 6 Function Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 43 

6.1 Group d: Display Parameters ........................................................................................................ 44 
6.1.1 d00: Status Display Parameters ............................................................................................................. 44 
6.2 Group F: General Function Parameters ....................................................................................... 47 
6.2.1 F00: Basic Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 47 
6.2.2 F01: Protection of Parameters................................................................................................................ 52 
6.2.3 F02: Run / Stop Control Parameters..................................................................................................... 53 
6.2.4 F03: Acc. / Dec. Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 56 
6.2.5 F04: Process PID Control .......................................................................................................................... 57 
6.2.6 F05: External Reference Curve Parameters ....................................................................................... 60 
6.2.7 F06: MS SPEED and Simple PLC ............................................................................................................. 62 
6.2.8 F07: Wobble Operation Parameters ..................................................................................................... 65 
6.2.9 F08: Asyn. Motor 1 Parameters .............................................................................................................. 66 
6.2.10 F09: V/f Control Parameters ................................................................................................................. 68 
6.2.11 F10: Motor 1 Vector Control Speed-loop Parameters ................................................................. 70 
6.2.12 F11: Motor 1 Vector Control Current Loop Parameter ................................................................ 71 
6.2.13 F13: Asyn. Motor 2 Parameters ........................................................................................................... 72 
6.2.14 F15: Digital I/O Terminal Parameters................................................................................................. 75 
6.2.15 F16: Analogue I/O Terminal Parameters .......................................................................................... 87 
6.2.16 F17: SCI Communication Parameters ............................................................................................... 91 
6.2.17 F18: Display Control Parameters ........................................................................................................ 92 
6.2.18 F19: Function-boost Parameters ........................................................................................................ 93 
 6.2.19 F20: Protection of Fault Parameters ............................................................................................... 101 
6.2.20 F21: Torque Control Parameters ...................................................................................................... 105 
6.2.21 F23: PWM Control Parameters.......................................................................................................... 106 
6.3 Group U: User Menu Mode Display Parameters....................................................................... 107 
6.4 Group y: Manufacturer Function Parameters........................................................................... 107 

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Maintenance ................................................................................................. 109 

7.1 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................ 109 
7.2 Maintenance .................................................................................................................................. 112 

Chapter 8 Options ................................................................................................................................................. 115 

8.1 HD30-EIO ........................................................................................................................................ 115 
8.2 HD30-PIO ........................................................................................................................................ 117 
8.3 Keypad Installation Assembly .................................................................................................... 118 
8.4 Power Regenerative Unit ............................................................................................................. 118 
8.5 Braking Unit and Braking Resistor ............................................................................................. 119 
8.6 Reactor Selection .......................................................................................................................... 121 

Appendix A Quick Start for User Menu of Group U ......................................................................................... 123 

Appendix B Parameters........................................................................................................................................ 124 

Appendix C Communication Protocol ............................................................................................................... 165 

 Safety Information and Precaution 1

Product Information 2

Mechanical Installation 3

Electrical Installation 4

Operation Instructions 5

Function Introduction 6

Troubleshooting and Maintenance 7

Options 8

Quick Start for User Menu of Group U A

Parameters B

Communication Protocol C
Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions

Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions

1.1 Safety Definition

1
Danger
Danger: A Danger contains information which is critical for avoiding safety hazard.

Warning
Warning: A Warning contains information which is essential for avoiding a risk of damage to products or other
equipements.

Note
Note: A Note contains information which helps to ensure correct operation of the product.

1.2 About Motor and Load

Compared to the standard frequency operation
The HD30 series inverters are voltage-type frequency inverter and their output is PWM wave with
certain harmonic wave. Therefore, the temperature, noise and vibration of the motor will be a little
higher than that at standard frequency operation.
Constant torque at low-speed operation
When the inverter drives a standard motor at low-speed running for a long time, the output torque
ratings will become worse due to the motor cooling is less effective. In that case, we suggest that you
should choose variable frequency motor.
Motor’s overload protecting threshold
When choose the adaptive motor, the inverter can effectively implement the motor thermal protection.
Otherwise it must adjust the motor protection parameters or other protection measures to ensure that
the motor is at a safe and reliable operation.
Operation above the motor rated frequency
If the motor exceeds its rated frequency operation, the noise will increase. It need play attention to the
motor vibration as well as ensure the motor bearings and mechanical devices to meet the requirement
of operation speed range.
Lubrication of mechanical devices
At long time low-speed operation, it should provide periodical lubrication maintenance for the
mechanical devices such as gear box and geared motor etc. to make sure the drive results meet the site
need.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―1―

Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Mechanical resonance point of load
By setting the skip frequency of the inverter (F05.17 - F05.19) to avoid the load device or the motor
mechanical resonance point.
Check the insulation of the motor
For the first time using of the motor or after long time storage, it need check the insulation of the
motor to avoid damage the inverter because of the worse insulation motor.
Note:
Please use a 500V Mega-Ohm-Meter to test and the insulation resistance must be higher than 5Mohm.

Energy feedbacks to inverter

For the occasion to boost load and the like, negative torque often occurs. You should consider setting
proper parameters of the braking unit if the inverter is prone to overcurrent or overvoltage fault trip.
Requirement for leakage current protector RCD
Since the device generates high leakage current which goes through the protective grounding
conductor, please install B type leakage current protector RCD on one side of the power supply.
For the selection of RCD, users need to consider the possible problems of ground leakage current in
both transient status and steady status at start and during running. It is recommended to choose
either special RCD that can suppress the higher harmonics, or general RCD that has more aftercurrent.
Warning for ground mass leakage current
The device generates mass leakage current, so users need to confirm the reliable grounding before
connect to the power supply. The grounding should comply with the local relative IEC standard.

1.3 About HD30

No capacitor or varistor on the output side
Since the inverter output is PWM wave, it is strictly forbidden to connect capacitor for improving the
power factor or varistor for lightning protection to the output terminals so as to avoid the inverter fault
tripping or component damage.
Contactors and circuit breakers connected to the output of the inverter
If circuit breaker or contactor needs to be connected between the inverter and the motor, be sure to
operate these circuit breakers or contactor when the inverter has no output, so as to avoid any damage
to the inverter.
Running voltage
The inverter is prohibited to be used beyond the specified range of operation voltage. If needed,
please use the suitable voltage regulation device to change the voltage.

―2― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions
Capacitor energy storage
When the AC power supply is cut off, capacitor of HD30 sustains deadly power for a while. So to
disassemble HD30 that is powered, please cut off the AC power supply for more than 10 minutes,
confirm the internal charge indicator is off and the voltage between (+) and (-) of the main circuit
terminals is below 36V.
Generally, the internal circuit enables the capacitor to discharge. However, the discharging may fail in
some exceptions. In these cases, users need to consult Hpmont or our regional distributor.
1
Change three-phase input to single-phase input
For three-phase input inverter, the users should not change it to single-phase input.
If you have to use single-phase power supply, you should disable the input phase-loss protection
function. And the bus-voltage and current ripple will increase, which not only influences the life of
electrolytic capacitor but also deteriorates the performance of the inverter. In that case, the inverter
must be derating and should be within the inverter 60% rated value.
Lightning surge protection
The inverter internal design has lightning surge overcurrent protection circuit, and has certain
self-protection capacity against the lightning.
Altitude and derating
In area where altitude exceeds 1000 meters, HD30 should be derating since the heatsink efficiency will
be reduced because of the tenuous air.
The rated value of output current derates by 1% for each 100m increase of the altitude. I.e for the
altitude of 3000m, derated rate is 20% for rated current of HD30. Figure 1-1 is the derating curve of
rated current and the altitude.
Rated current of HD30
100%
70%

Altitude
1000m 4000m
Figure 1-1 Derating curve of rated current and altitude

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―3―

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 2 Product Information

Chapter 2 Product Information

2.1 Model
HD30-4T5P5G/7P5P-X
Product Series

Voltage Rating
200 - 240VAC = 2
380 - 460VAC = 4
2
Phase
Single-phase / Three-phase input = D
Three-phase input = T
Power

Product Type
General = G
Fan and pump = P
Special Feature

2.2 Nameplate

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

HZ A V RPM %

Product model MODEL: HD30-4T5P5G/7P5P

Motor power POWER: 5.5/7.5kW
Input specification INPUT: 3PH 380-460V 15/19A 50/60Hz
Output specification OUTPUT: 8.5/11kVA 0-460V 13/17A 0-400Hz
Software version Version: 1.00
Serial number

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―5―

Chapter 2 Product Information Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.

2.3 Rated Value

Refer to section 3.4 Dimensions and Weight (on page 13) for size information.
Motor Rated capacity Rated input Rated output
Model Size
(kW) (kVA) current (A) current (A)
Single/three-phase power supply: 200 - 240V, 50/60Hz
HD30-2D0P4G 0.4 1.0 5.8 / 2.7(1) 2.5 Frame 1
HD30-2D0P7G 0.75 1.5 10.5 / 4.2(1) 4.0 Frame 1
HD30-2D1P5G 1.5 2.8 18.5 / 7.7(1) 7.5 Frame 1
HD30-2D2P2G 2.2 3.8 24.1 / 12(1) 10 Frame 1
HD30-2D3P7G 3.7 5.9 40 / 19(1) 17 Frame 2
HD30-2D5P5G 5.5 8.5 60 / 28(1) 25 Frame 3
HD30-2D7P5G 7.5 11 75 / 35(1) 32 Frame 3
HD30-2D011G 11 16 100 / 47(1) 45 Frame 4
HD30-2D015G 15 21 130 / 62(1) 55 Frame 5A
(1):Value before / is for single-phase model, value after / is for three-phase model
Three-phase power supply: 200 - 240V, 50/60Hz
HD30-2T018G 18.5 24 77 70 Frame 5
HD30-2T022G 22 30 92 80 Frame 6
HD30-2T030G 30 39 113 110 Frame 6
HD30-2T037G 37 49 156 130 Frame 6
HD30-2T045G 45 59 180 160 Frame 7
HD30-2T055G 55 72 214 200 Frame 7
HD30-2T075G 75 100 256 253 Frame 7
Three-phase power supply: 380 - 460V, 50/60Hz
HD30-4T0P7G 0.75 1.5 3.4 2.3 Frame 1
HD30-4T1P5G 1.5 2.5 5.2 3.8 Frame 1
HD30-4T2P2G 2.2 3.4 7.3 5.1 Frame 1
HD30-4T3P7G/5P5P 3.7/5.5 5.9/8.5 11.9/15 9.0/13 Frame 2
HD30-4T5P5G/7P5P 5.5/7.5 8.5/11 15/19 13/17 Frame 2
HD30-4T7P5G/011P 7.5/11 11/16 19/28 17/25 Frame 3
HD30-4T011G/015P 11/15 16/21 28/35 25/32 Frame 3
HD30-4T015G/018P 15/18.5 21/24 35/39 32/37 Frame 4
HD30-4T018G/022P 18.5/22 24/30 39/47 37/45 Frame 4
HD30-4T022G/030P 22/30 30/39 47/62 45/60 Frame 5
HD30-4T030G/037P 30/37 39/49 62/77 60/75 Frame 5
HD30-4T037G/045P 37/45 49/59 77/92 75/90 Frame 6
HD30-4T045G/055P 45/55 59/72 92/113 90/110 Frame 6
HD30-4T055G/075P 55/75 72/100 113/156 110/152 Frame 6
HD30-4T075G/090P 75/90 100/116 156/180 152/176 Frame 7
HD30-4T090G/110P 90/110 116/138 180/214 176/210 Frame 7
HD30-4T110G/132P 110/132 138/167 214/256 210/253 Frame 7

―6― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 2 Product Information
Motor Rated capacity Rated input Rated output
Model Size
(kW) (kVA) current (A) current (A)
HD30-4T132G/160P
132/160 167/200 256/307 253/304 Frame 8
HD30-4T132G/160P-C
HD30-4T160G/200P
160/200 200/250 307/385 304/380 Frame 8
HD30-4T160G/200P-C
HD30-4T200G/220P
200/220 250/280 385/430 380/426 Frame 8
HD30-4T200G/220P-C
HD30-4T220G/250P
220/250 280/309 430/475 426/470 Frame 9
HD30-4T220G/250P-C 2
HD30-4T250G/280P
250/280 309/349 475/535 470/530 Frame 9
HD30-4T250G/280P-C
HD30-4T280G/315P
280/315 349/398 535/609 530/600 Frame 9
HD30-4T280G/315P-C
HD30-4T315G/355P
315/355 398/434 609/664 600/660 Frame 10
HD30-4T315G/355P-C
HD30-4T355G/400P
355/400 434/494 664/754 660/750 Frame 10
HD30-4T355G/400P-C
HD30-4T400G/450P
400/450 494/560 754/852 750/830 Frame 10
HD30-4T400G/450P-C

2.4 Technical Data

Electrical
Single/three-phase: 200 - 240V
Input voltage Three-phase: 380 - 460V
Fluctuating within ± 10%, unbalance rate < 3%
Input frequency 50/60Hz ± 5%
Output voltage 0 - input voltage
Output frequency 0 - 400.00Hz
Performance
G: 150% rated output current for 2 minutes, 180% rated output current for 10 seconds
Maximum current
P: 130% rated output current for 1 minutes, 150% rated output current for 10 seconds
Control mode V/f, SVC
Running command Keypad; Terminal; SCI communication
Speed setting Digital; Analogue / pulse; SCI communication
Digital setting: 0.01Hz
Speed resulotion
Analogue setting: 0.1% × max-frequency
Speed control accuracy SVC: ± 0.5%
Speed control range SVC: 1:100
Torque control response SVC: < 200ms
Start torque SVC: 180% rated torque / 0.5Hz
Torque control accuracy ±5%

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―7―

Chapter 2 Product Information Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Characteristic Functions
User custom menu A total of 16 user-defined mapping, the user can edit
Parameter upload and You can achieve two sets of parameters from the inverter control keypad copied to the
download function control keypad and copied from the operation keypad to the inverter control keypad
Programmable I/O
Input terminal function can be edited and output terminal function can be edited
terminals
Process PID adjustment Internal process PID module
Simple PLC To achive time and multi-frequency output with internal simple PLC module
Wobble operation Internal wobble operation module
Length control Internal length control module
Standard MODBUS communication protocol.
Compatible with a variety
The optional PROFIBUS bus module is compatible with the PROFIBUS protocol;
of communication
Optional DeviceNet bus module is compatible with DeviceNet protocol;
protocols
Optional CAN bus module is compatible with CAN communication protocol
Protection Functions
Stall overvoltage Bus voltage can auto-control against overvoltage fault
Auto-limited current
Output current can auto-limit against overcurrent fault
protection
Overload pre-alarm and
Overload early pre-alarm and protect
alarm
Load loss protection Load loss alarm function
I/O phase loss protection I/O phase loss auto-detect and alarm function

Braking fault protection Braking detecion and alarming function

Power output grounding

Power output grounding fault protection is enabled
fault protection
Power output grounding
Power output grounding fault protection is enabled
fault protection
Power output short circuit
Power output short circuit protection is enabled
protection
Input / Output
Analogue power supply +10V, max. current 100mA
Digital supply +24V, max. current 200mA
AI1: voltage 0 - 10V
Analogue input AI2: -10V - +10V/0 - 20mA (selectable voltage/current)
Optional HD30-EIO expansion card can be extended to 4 road
Analogue output AO1, AO2: 0 - 10V/0 - 20mA (selectable voltage/current)
DI1 - DI6, DI6 can be selected as high - speed pulse signal
Digital input
Optional HD30-EIO expansion card can be extended to 9
Digital output DO1, DO2, DO2 can be selected as high frequency pulse signal output
Programmable relay R1A/R1B/R1C: Contact rating 250VAC/3A or 30VDC/1A
output Optional HD30-EIO expansion card can be extended to 4
SCI communication RJ45 interface, A,B terminal

―8― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 2 Product Information
Keypad
Five LEDs display
Setting frequency, output frequency, output voltage, output current, motor speed,
LED display
output torque, switching value terminal, status parameter, programm menu
parameter and fault code etc.
LCD display Optional (HD-LCD), display operation contents in Chinese or English
Parameter copy Both LED and LCD keypad can achive quick parameter copy
Indicator 5 unit indicators, 5 status indicators
Environment
-10 - +40℃, max. 50℃, air temperature fluctuation is less than 0.5℃/min 2
Running temperature The derating value of output current of HD30 shall be 2% for each degree centigrade
above 40℃. Max. allowed temperature is 50℃
Storage temperature -40 - +70℃
Indoor, preventing from direct sunlight, no dust, corrosive, flammable gases, oil mist,
Location for use
water vaper, dripping or salt etc.
Altitude Less than 1000 meters, otherwise should be derating use
Humidity Less than 95%RH, non-condensing
Vibration Resistance It is 3.5m/s2 in 2 - 9Hz, it is 10m/s2 (IEC60721-3-3) in 9 - 200Hz
Protection Class IP20
Pollution level Level 2 (Dry, non canducting dust pollution)
Accessories
I/O board HD30-EIO, HD30-PIO
PROFIBUS option [HDFB-PROFIBUS-DP]
Bus communication DeviceNet option [HDFB-DeviceNet]
CAN option [HDFB-CAN]
Status keypad [HD-LED-L]
Small-size keypad [HD-LED-P-S]
LED display pane with potentiometer [HD-LED-P]
About keypad LCD keypad [HD-LCD]
Mounting base to keypad [HD-KMB]
Small-size external mounting base [HD-KMB-S]
1m/2m/3m/6m extension cable to keypad [HD-CAB-1M/2M/3M/6M]
Dynamic braking unit [HDBU]
Power unit
Power regenerative unit [HDRU]

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―9―

Chapter 2 Product Information Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.

2.5 Parts of Inverter

Fan cover Mounting hole

Middle enclosure
Keypad
Bottom enclosure

Upper cover
Certification

Lower cover Nameplate

Connection holes of control terminal

Size F5 - F10
Size F1 - F4

Connection holes of power terminal

―10― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation

Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation

3.1 Precautions

Danger
• Do not install if HD30 is incomplete or impaired.
• Please see the controller size and weight to take appropriate tools for handing, avoid harming from sharp edges or
injured by a dropped controller.
• Make sure that HD30 is far from the explosive and flammable things.
• Do not do wiring operation until power supply is cut off for more than 10 minutes, the internal charge indicator of
HD30 is off and the voltage between (+) and (-) of the main circuit terminals is below 36V.
3

Warning
• It is required not only carry the keypad and the cover but also the inverter bottom enclosure.
• Do not play metal into the inverter when installing.

3.2 Installation Site Requirement

Ensure the installation site meets the following requirements:
• Do not install at the direct sunlight, moisture, water droplet location;
• Do not install at flammable, explosive, corrosive gas and liquid location;
• Do not install at oily dust, fiber and metal powder location;
• Be vertical installed on fire-retardant material with a strong support;
• Make sure adequate cooling space for HD30 so as to keep ambient temperature between - 10 - +
40℃;
• Install at where the vibration is 3.5m/s2 in 2 - 9Hz, 10m/s2 in 9 - 200Hz (IEC60721-3-3);
• Install at where the humidity is less than 95%RH and non-condensing location;
• Protection level of HD30 is IP20 and pollution level is 2 (Dry, non-conducting dust pollution).

Note:
1. It needs derating use running temperature exceeds 40℃. The derating value of the output current of
HD30 shall be 2% for each degree centigrade. Max. allowed temperature is 50℃.
2. Keep ambient temperature between -10 - +40℃. It can improve the running performance if install at
location with good ventilation or cooling devices.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―11―

Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.

3.3 Installation Direction and Space Requirements

To achieve good cooling efficiency, install the inverter
perpendicularly and always provide the following space to C B C
allow normal heat dissipation. The requirements on mounting
space and clearance are shown in Table 3-1.
Table 3-1 Inverter installation space size table
A A
HD30 power ≤55kW ≥75kW
A (left and right) ≥50mm ≥150mm
B (up and down) ≥100mm ≥350mm
C (up vent) ≥50mm ≥100mm
≥50mm ≥100mm D B D
D (down vent)
123

More than one inverter with the installation of the upper and
lower, the middle should be installed with diversion partitions,
installation space size see Table 3-2. a
Table 3-2 Multi-inverters changer installation space dimension
HD30 power ≤55kW ≥75kW
A ≥50mm ≥100mm
B ≥50mm ≥100mm
≥50mm ≥100mm b
C
a ≥50mm ≥100mm c

b ≥50mm ≥100mm
C
c ≥50mm ≥100mm B
123

―12― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation

3.4 Dimensions and Weight

The dimensions and weight of HD3L are as shown in Table 3-3 and Table 3-4.
For the corresponding model of the mounting size, please refer to section 2.3 Rated Value, on page 6.
W D
W1 4-Ød

H1

H2
H

3
Size F1 - F4
W
W1 D
4-Ød

H2
H1
H

Size F5 - F6
W D
W1
4-Ød
H2
H1
H

Frame 7 - Frame 10

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―13―

Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Table 3-3 HD30 dimensions and weight
Dimension (mm) Mounting Size (mm) GW
Size
W H D W1 H1 H2 d (kg)
Frame 1 135 241 162 91 226 220 5 2.4
Frame 2 165 266 190 115 253 245 5 4.4
Frame 3 200 299 210 146 286 280 5 5.8
Frame 4 235 353 222 167 337 330 7 8.2
Frame 5 290 469 240 235 445 430 8 20.4
Frame 5 A 295 448 205 235 432 418 7 19.5
Frame 6 380 598 290 260 576 550 10 48
Frame 7 500 721 330 343 696 670 12 80
Frame 8 620 917 360 450 890 850 12 115
Frame 9 740 1067 370 520 1040 1000 14 150
Frame 10 970 1316 380 620 1286 1250 14 190

W
W1 4-Ød
D1

D
H

Figure 3-1 HD30 cabinet

Table 3-4 HD30 cabinet dimension
Dimension (mm) Mounting Size (mm)
Size (-C)
W H D W1 D1 d
Frame 8 620 1250 360 500 270 18
Frame 9 740 1500 370 600 280 18
Frame 10 970 1650 380 700 280 18

―14― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation

3.5 Install and Dismantle Keypad

According to the direction of Figure 3–2, press the keypad until hear a “click” sound.
Do not install the keypad from other directions or it will cause poor contact.

3
Figure 3–2 Install keypad
There are two steps in Figure 3–3.
First, press the hook of the keypad according to direction 1. Second, take out of the keypad according
to direction 2.
1
2

Figure 3–3 Dismantle keypad

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―15―

Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.

3.6 Dismantle Plastic Cover

The upper cover and the lower cover of the HD30 series inverter are removable. The dismantle step is
shown as Figure 3-4.
Before removing the upper cover, please take away the keypad.

(a)

The removing processes of plastic

cover board:

1. Extrude the hooks at both sides together,

take off the lower cover, as (a).
2. Dismantle the screws of upper cover, as (b).
3. Extrude the hooks at both sides together,
take off the upper cover, as (c).

(b)

(c)
Figure 3-4 Dismantle of the plastic cover

―16― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 4 Electrical Installation

Chapter 4 Electrical Installation

4.1 Wiring Precautions

Danger
• Only qualified electrical engineer can perform wiring job.
• Only when the power supply switch is completely off can you do the wiring job.
• You can’t open the inverter cover to do wiring operation until the power is cut-off 10 minutes later. Do not wire or
detach the inverter internal devices at power-on situation.
• Do not do wiring operation until the internal charge indicator of the inverter is off and the voltage between (+)
and (-) of the main circuit terminals is below 36V.
• Check the wiring carefully before connecting emergency stop or safety circuit.
• The earth terminal PE of the inverters must be reliable earthing. It must use two separate earth wire due to the
leakage current from the inverter to ground.
• It must use Type B mode when utilize earth leakage protection devices (ELCB/RCD).
• Do not touch the wire terminals of the inverter when it is live. The main circuit terminals is neither allowed
4
connecting to the enclosure nor short-circuiting.

Warning
• Do not do dielectric strength test on the inverter.
• Do wiring connection of the braking resistor or the braking unit according to the wiring figure.
• Make sure the terminals are fixed tightly.
• Do not connect the AC supply cable to the output terminals U, V, W of the inverter.
• Do not connect the phase-shifting capacitors to the output circuit.
• Be sure the inverter has ceased output before switching motor or change-over switches.
• The inverter DC bus terminals must not be short-circuited.

4.2 Peripheral Accessories Selection

4.2.1 Wiring specifications of input and output
The AC supply to HD30 must be installed with suitable protection against overload and short-circuits,
i.e. MCCB (molded case circuit breaker) or equivalent device.
The recommended specification of MCCB, contactor & cables are shown as Table 4-2.
The size of ground wire should accord with the requirement in 4.3.5.4 of IEC61800-5-1, as shown in
Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 Sectional area of ground protective conductor
Sectional area S of phase conductor (power supply
S ≤ 2.5 2.5 < S ≤ 16 16 < S ≤ 35 S > 35
cable) while installing (mm2)
Min. sectional area Sp of relative protective conductor
2.5 S 16 S/2
(ground cable) (mm2)

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―17―

Chapter 4 Electrical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Table 4-2 HD30 I/O wiring specification
MCCB Contactor Supply Motor Ground
Model Size
(A) (A) Cable (mm2) Cable (mm2) Cable (mm2)
Single/three phase: 200 - 240V, 50/60Hz
HD30-2D0P4G 16 10 0.5 0.5 2.5 Frame 1
HD30-2D0P7G 16 10 0.75 / 0.5(1) 0.5 2.5 Frame 1
HD30-2D1P5G 20 16 4 / 0.75(1) 0.8 4 / 2.5(1) Frame 1
(1)
HD30-2D2P2G 32 20 6 / 2.5 1.5 6 / 2.5(1) Frame 1
HD30-2D3P7G 100 / 40(1) 63 / 32(1) 10 / 4(1) 4 10 / 4(1) Frame 2
HD30-2D5P5G 125 / 63(1) 100 / 40(1) 25 / 6(1) 6 16 / 6(1) Frame 3
HD30-2D7P5G 160 / 63(1) 100 / 40(1) 25 / 10(1) 10 16 / 10(1) Frame 3
HD30-2D011G 200 / 100(1) 125 / 63(1) 25 / 16(1) 16 16 Frame 4
HD30-2D015G 200 / 125(1) 160 / 100(1) 50 / 25(1) 16 25 / 16(1) Frame 5A
(1): Value before / is for single-phase model, value after / is for three-phase model.
Three phase: 200 - 240V, 50/60Hz
HD30-2T018G 160 100 25 25 16 Frame 5
HD30-2T022G 200 125 35 35 16 Frame 6
HD30-2T030G 200 125 35 35 16 Frame 6
HD30-2T037G 250 160 50 50 25 Frame 6
HD30-2T045G 250 160 95 70 50 Frame 7
HD30-2T055G 350 350 95 95 50 Frame 7
HD30-2T075G 400 400 120 120 50 Frame 7
Three phase: 380 - 460V, 50/60Hz
HD30-4T0P7G 10 10 0.5 0.5 2.5 Frame 1
HD30-4T1P5G 16 10 0.75 0.5 2.5 Frame 1
HD30-4T2P2G 16 10 1.5 0.75 2.5 Frame 1
HD30-4T3P7G/5P5P 25 16 2.5 2.5 2.5 Frame 2
HD30-4T5P5G/7P5P 32 25 4 4 4 Frame 2
HD30-4T7P5G/011P 40 32 6 6 6 Frame 3
HD30-4T011G/015P 63 40 10 10 10 Frame 3
HD30-4T015G/018P 63 40 10 10 10 Frame 4
HD30-4T018G/022P 100 63 16 16 16 Frame 4
HD30-4T022G/030P 100 63 25 25 16 Frame 5
HD30-4T030G/037P 125 100 35 35 16 Frame 5
HD30-4T037G/045P 160 100 35 35 16 Frame 6
HD30-4T045G/055P 200 125 35 35 16 Frame 6
HD30-4T055G/075P 200 125 50 50 25 Frame 6
HD30-4T075G/090P 250 160 95 70 50 Frame 7
HD30-4T090G/110P 250 160 120 120 50 Frame 7
HD30-4T110G/132P 350 350 120 120 50 Frame 7
HD30-4T132G/160P
400 400 185 185 95 Frame 8
HD30-4T132G/160P-C

―18― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 4 Electrical Installation
MCCB Contactor Supply Motor Ground
Model Size
(A) (A) Cable (mm2) Cable (mm2) Cable (mm2)
HD30-4T160G/200P
500 400 240 240 120 Frame 8
HD30-4T160G/200P-C
HD30-4T200G/220P
600 600 120*2(2) 120*2(2) 120 Frame 8
HD30-4T200G/220P-C
HD30-4T220G/250P
600 600 120*2(2) 120*2(2) 120 Frame 9
HD30-4T220G/250P-C
HD30-4T250G/280P
800 600 150*2(2) 150*2(2) 150 Frame 9
HD30-4T250G/280P-C
HD30-4T280G/315P
800 800 185*2(2) 185*2(2) 185 Frame 9
HD30-4T280G/315P-C
HD30-4T315G/355P
800 800 240*2(2) 240*2(2) 240 Frame 10
HD30-4T315G/355P-C
HD30-4T355G/400P
800 800 240*2(2) 240*2(2) 240 Frame 10
HD30-4T355G/400P-C
HD30-4T400G/450P
1000 1000 300*2(2) 300*2(2) 300 Frame 10
4
HD30-4T400G/450P-C
(2): *2 means 2power lines or motor line paralled.

4.2.2 Power terminal lug

Select the lug of power terminal according to the size of terminal, screw size and max. outer diameter
of lug. Refer to Table 4-3.
Take the round terminal as an example.
Table 4-3 Selection of power terminal lug
Size Screw size Tightening torque (N. M) Max. outer diameter of lug d (mm)
Frame 1 M3.5 0.8 - 1.2 7
Frame 2 M4 1.2 - 1.5 9.9
Frame 3 M5 2.5 - 3.0 12
Frame 4 M5 2.5 - 3.0 12
Frame 5 M6 4.0 - 5.0 15.5 d
Frame 5A M6 4.0 - 5.0 15.5
Frame 6 M8 9.0 - 10.0 24
Frame 7 M10 17.6 - 22.5 30
Frame 8 M12 31.4 - 39.2 35
Frame 9 M12 31.4 - 39.2 35
Frame 10 M16 48.6 - 59.4 55

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―19―

Chapter 4 Electrical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.

4.3 Main Circuit Terminals and Wiring

Danger
• The bare portions of the power cables must be bound with insulation tapes.

Warning
• Ensure that AC supply voltage is the same as rated input voltage of HD30.

4.3.1 Supply and Motor Terminal

Table 4-4 Supply and motor terminal description
Frame 1 - Frame 2
• L1, L2, L3: Three-phase AC
power input terminals
• U, V, W: Output terminals,
connect to three-phase AC
motor
• (+), (-): DC supply input
terminals; DC input
terminals of power
L1 L2 L3 U V W
regenerative unit (+) (-) BR PE
POWER MOTOR
• (+), BR: Braking resistor
connection terminals
• PE: Ground terminal,
connect to the ground
Frame 3 - Frame 6
• L1, L2, L3: Three-phase AC
power input terminals
• U, V, W: Output terminals,
connect to three-phase AC
motor
• P1, (+): DC reactor
connection terminals
• (+), (-): DC supply input
L1 L2 L3 U V W
terminals; DC input P1 (+) (-) BR PE
POWER MOTOR
terminals of power
regenerative unit
• (+), BR: Braking resistor
connection terminals
• PE: Ground terminal,
connect to the ground

―20― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 4 Electrical Installation
Frame 7 - Frame 9 (Contain –C)

• L1, L2, L3: Three-phase AC

power input terminals L1 L2 L3
PE POWER
P1 (+) (-)
• U, V, W: Output terminals,
connect to three-phase AC
motor
• P1, (+): DC reactor
connection terminals
• (+), (-): DC supply input
terminals; DC input
terminals of power
regenerative unit
• PE: Ground terminal,
connect to the ground U V W
PE MOTOR

Frame 10 (Contain –C) 4

PE L1 L2 L3 (+) (-)
POWER

• L1, L2, L3: Three-phase AC

power input terminals
• U, V, W: Output terminals,
connect to three-phase AC
motor
• (+), (-): DC supply input
terminals; DC input
terminals of power
regenerative unit
• PE: Ground terminal,
connect to the ground

PE U V W
MOTOR

4.3.2 Power Terminal Wiring

During trial operation, make sure the inverter runs forward when the forward command is enabled. If
not, switch any two of the output terminals (U, V, W) or modify the setting of parameter F00.17 to
change the motor’s direction.
The supply and motor connection are shown as Table 4-5.
For selection of contactor, MCCB, power cable, motor cable and ground cable, refer to section 4.2
Peripheral Accessories Selection (on page 17).
Refer to section 8.5 Braking Unit and Braking Resistor (on page 119) for braking resistor and unit.
Refer to section 8.6 Reactor Selection (on page 121) for AC reactors and DC reactors.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―21―

Chapter 4 Electrical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Table 4-5 Supply and motor connection

L1 L2 L3 (+) (-) BR U V W PE

EMI filter

Braking
Frame 1 - Frame 2 AC reactor resistor
Supply
ground
MCCB

Contactor

Mains supply

L1 L2 L3 P1 (+) (-) BR U V W PE

EMI filter

Frame 3 - Frame 6 AC reactor DC Braking

reactor resistor Supply
ground
MCCB

Contactor

Mains supply

PE L1 L2 L3 P1 (+) (-) PE U V W

Braking
EMI filter resistor

Frame 7 - Frame 9 Supply Supply

AC reactor DC (+) (-) BR1 BR2
(-C) ground ground
reactor Braking unit
MCCB

Contactor

Mains supply

―22― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 4 Electrical Installation

PE L1 L2 L3 (+) (-) PE U V W

Braking
EMI filter resistor

Frame 10 (-C) Supply (+) (-) BR1 BR2 Supply

ground AC reactor ground
Braking unit
MCCB
Contactor
Note: The DC reactor is built-in
Mains supply

4.4 Control Board

Danger
4
• The control circuit is basically isolated with the power circuit. Do not touch HD30 after it is powered.

Warning
• If the control circuit is connected to external devices with live touchable port, it should increase an additional
isolating barrier to ensure that voltage classification of external devices not be changed.
• If connect the communication terminal of the control circuit to the PC, choose the RS485/232 isolating converter
which meets the safety requirement.
• Only connect the relay terminal to AC 220V voltage signal. Other control terminals are strictly forbiden for this
connection.

4.4.1 Control Board Terminal

Control Board

Terminal
+10 AI1 AI2 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 COM COM R1A
GND GND AO1 AO2 P24 SEL COM CME DO1 DO2 R1B R1C
Figure 4-1 Control board terminal

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―23―

Chapter 4 Electrical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Table 4-6 Control board terminal description
Terminal Description
Analogue input use +10V power supply, max. output current is 100mA
+10, GND +10V power supply
GND is isolated to COM
AI1 input voltage: 0 - 10V (input impedance: 34kΩ)
AI2 input voltage: -10V - 10V (input impedance: 34kΩ)
AI1, AI2 Anglogue input
AI2 input current: 0 - 20mA (input impedance: 500Ω)
• AI2, AI3 can select voltage/current
AO1, AO2 Anglogue output Output voltage/current signal: 0 - 10V/0 - 20mA
GND Anglogue ground Programmable output
Programmable bipolar optional input signal
Input voltage:l 0 - 30VDC
DI1 - DI6 Digital input
DI1 - DI5 input impedance: 4.7kW, DI6 input impedance: 1.6kΩ
• DI6 can be selectable for high-frequency input, max-frequency 50kHz
Digital input use +24V as supply, max. output current is 200mA
P24, COM Digital power supply
COM is isolated to CME
Digital input common SEL and P24 are connected by default (factory setting)
SEL
terminal • Disconnect SEL and P24 when use external power to drive DI
Programmable optocoupler isolation
DO1, CME Digital output
• DO1, DO2 open collector output, output voltage: 0 - 30VDC, max.
output current 50mA
• DO2 can be selectable for high-frequency output, max-frequency
50kHz
DO2, COM Digital output
CME is isolated to COM, shortly connected to COM by default
• Disconnect CME and COM when they are isolating output
Programmable output, contact rating: 250VAC/3A or 30VDC/1A
R1A/R1B/R1C Relay output
• R1B,R1C: normally closed; R1A,R1C: normally open

Note:
Limit the current within 3A if the relay terminal is to connect to AC 220V voltage signal.

―24― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 4 Electrical Installation
4.4.2 Jumper
CN9

CN6 Control Board

CN7
CN8

Figure 4-2 Jumper position

Table 4-7 Jumper description
Jumper Description
1

AI2 can select voltage or current signal.

CN6 • Pin 1 & 2 are short-connected, AI2 inputs voltage signal (factory setting).
• Pin 2 & 3 are short-connected, AI2 inputs current signal.
3
1

AO1 can select voltage or current signal.

CN7 • Pin 1 & 2 are short-connected, AO1 inputs voltage signal (factory setting). 4
• Pin 2 & 3 are short-connected, AO1 inputs current signal.
3
1

AO2 can select voltage or current signal.

CN8 • Pin 1 & 2 are short-connected, AO2 inputs voltage signal (factory setting).
• Pin 2 & 3 are short-connected, AO2 inputs current signal.
3
1

SCI communication can select proper resistance.

CN9 • Pin 1 & 2 are short-connected, select the proper resistance.
• Pin 2 & 3 are short-connected, no resistance (factory setting).
3

4.4.3 Communication Terminal

Do not use communication terminal and RJ45 Terminal Description
A
simultaneously. A 485+
B
B 485-
Pin Difinition
Control Board
Terminal 1,3 +5V

RJ45 2 485+
1 8
4,5,6 GND
RJ45
7 485-
8 Unused

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―25―

Chapter 4 Electrical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
4.4.4 Control Terminal Wiring
To reduce the interference and attenuation of control signal, length of control cable should limit within
50m. There should be more than 0.3m between the control cable and the motor cable.
The control cable must be shielded cable. The analogue signal cable must be shielded twisted pair.

Input terminal 1 DO1

DI1 Output terminal 1
Input terminal 2
DI2 CME
Input terminal 3
DI3 DO2
HD30 Output terminal 2
Input terminal 4
DI4 Control Board
COM
Input terminal 5
DI5
Input terminal 6 R1C
DI6
R1B Relay output 1
COM
R1A
+10
AO1
AI1
1

AI1
CN7

AI2
AO1 Analogue output 1
1

AI2
CN6

AI2 AO2 AO2 Analogue output 2

3

1
CN8

GND GND
3

PE
Figure 4-3 HD30 control board connection

Digital Input Connection

Dry contact
Using the internal 24V power supply (SEL and P24 are short-connected at factory) or external power
supply (remove the connector between SEL and P24), their connections are shown in Figure 4-4.
+24V +24V
P24 P24

SEL SEL
Dry contact +
DC - Dry contact
Current Using internal Using external
power supply 12 - 30V
Current power supply
K K
DI1...DI6 DI1...DI6

COM COM
Figure 4-4 Dry contact connection

―26― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 4 Electrical Installation
Source / Drain
Using external power supply, the source / drain connection are shown in Figure 4-5. (Remove the
connector between SEL and P24)
+24V
P24 +24V
DC P24

+
-
12 - 30V
SEL
DC SEL
+ 12 - 30V
-
COM
1
DI1

External controller
1
External controller

DI1
Source Drain
Using external Using external
power supply power supply
6
DI6
6
DI6
COM
Figure 4-5 Source / Drain connection when using external power
4
Using internal 24V power supply of HD30, it is NPN / PNP connection in which external controller is
common emitter output, as shown in Figure 4-6. (For PNP, remove the connector between SEL and
P24)
+24V +24V
P24 P24

SEL SEL
COM
1 1
DI1 DI1
External controller

External controller

NPN PNP
Using internal Using internal
power supply power supply
6
DI6 6
DI6

COM

Figure 4-6 NPN (source) / PNP (drain) connection when using internal power supply

Analogue Input (AI) Connection

The AI1 is voltage input and the range is 0 - 10V, as shown in Figure 4-7.
< 50m Signal linewindingon theferritecore
for 2or 3turns.
+10 Ferrite core
Potentiometer

AI1
AI1 Filter capacitor
0.022uF/50V

GND GND
PE
Figure 4-7 AI1 connection

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―27―

Chapter 4 Electrical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.

Note:
1. To reduce the interference and attenuation of control signal, length of control cable should limit within
50 m, and the shield should be reliably grounded.
2. In serious interference occasions, the analogue input signal should add filter capacitor and ferrite core,
as shown in Figure 4-7.

AI2 are selected as voltage input and the range is -10 - +10V. When selecting internal +10V of HD30,
refer to Figure 4-7; selecting +/-10V external supply, refer to Figure 4-8.
AI2 are selected as current input and the range is 0 - 20mA, refer to Figure 4-8.
External power supply
+10V
AI2
AI2
-10V

GND GND GND

PE PE
Figure 4-8 AI2 connection

Digital Output (DO) Connection

DO1 is open collective output. DO1 can use internal 24V power supply of inverter or external power
supply. The connection is shown in Figure 4-9.
+24V +24V
Using internal power supply

Using external power supply

P24 P24
Relay
coil

DO1 DO1 +
Relay - DC
coil 12 - 30V
CME CME
COM COM
Figure 4-9 DO1 connection
DO2 is open collective output, refer to Figure 4-9.
DO2 is pulse frequency output; DO2 can use internal 24V power supply of inverter or external power
supply. The connection is shown in Figure 4-10.
+24V +24V
Using external power supply

R: 10kΩ pull-up resistor

Using internal power supply

f: Digital frequency meter

P24 P24
R
R
DO2 DO2
+
f f - DC
12 - 30V
COM COM

Figure 4-10 DO2 connection

―28― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 4 Electrical Installation

4.5 Meet EMC Requirement of Installation

4.5.1 Correct EMC Installation
According national standards GB/T12668.3, the inverter should meet the two requirements of
electromagnetic interference (EMI) and anti-electromagnetic interference. The international standards
IEC/61800-3 (VVVF drive system part 3: EMC specifications and test methods) are identical to the
national standards GB/T12668.3.
HD30 are designed and produced according to the requirements of IEC/61800-3. Please install the
inverter as per the description below so as to achieve good electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
Divide the installation space into different areas:
• In a drive system, the inverter, control equipment and sensors are installed in the same cabinet, the
electromagnetic noise should be suppressed at the main connecting points with the EMI filter and
input reactor installed in cabinet to satisfy the EMC requirements.
• The most effective but expensive measure to reduce the interference is to isolate the noise source
and the noise receiver, which should be considered in mechanical system design phase. In driving
system, the noise source can be inverter, braking unit and contactor. Noise receiver can be
4
automation equipment, encoder and sensor etc.
The mechanical/system is divided into different EMC areas according to its electrical characteristics.
The recommended installation positions are shown in Figure 4-11.
Mains power supply

Area E
Power supply control cabinet
Area A: transformers of control power
Area A Area C supply, control devices and sensor etc.
AC reactor Area B: interfaces of signal and control
cables, correct immunity is required.
Area C: noise sources such as AC reactor,
Control device (the EMI filter controller, braking unit and contactor.
host PC, PLC etc.) Area D: output EMI filter and its cable connection.

Area B Area E: power spply.

Inverter
Area F: motor and its cable.

Sensor (temperature, Area D

liquid level sensor) etc. EMI filter

Earth isolated board

Area F
Mechanical system Motor

Manufacture machines
Figure 4-11 System wiring
• All areas should be isolated in space to achieve electromagnetic decoupling effect.
• The minimum distance between areas should be 20cm, and use grounding bars for decoupling
among areas, the cables from different area should be placed in different tubes.
• EMI filters should be installed at the interfaces between different areas if necessary.
• Bus cable (such as RS485) and signal cable must be shielded.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―29―

Chapter 4 Electrical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
4.5.2 Wiring Requirement
In order to avoid interference intercoupling, it is recommended to separate the power supply cables,
motor cables and the control cables, and keep enough distance among them, especially when the
cables are laid in parallel and are long enough.
The signal cables should cross the power supply cables or motor cables, keep it perpendicular (90°) as
shown in Figure 4-12.
Distribute the power supply cables, motor cables and control cables in different pipelines.

Power supply cable

HD30 >30 cm
Motor cable

Control cable 90° 90° Control cable

>20 cm >50 cm
Power supply cable Motor cable

Figure 4-12 System wiring

Shielded / Armoured cable: High frequency low impedance shielded cable should be used. For
example: copper net, aluminum net or iron net.
Normally, the control cables must use the shielded cables and the shielding metal net must be
connected to the metal enclosure of the inverter by cable clamps as shown in Figure 4-13.

PE PE

Metal enclosure Metal enclosure

Figure 4-13 Shielded cable connection

4.5.3 Motor Connection

The longer cable between the controller and the motor is, the higher frequency leakage current will be,
causing the inverter output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices.
When the cable length is longer than 100 meters, it is recommended to install AC output reactor and
adjust the carrier frequency according to Table 4-8.
Table 4-8 Carrier frequency and the cable length betweeninverter and motor
Cable length < 30m 30 - 50m 50 - 100m ≥ 100m
Carrier frequency 15kHz below 10kHz below 5kHz below 2kHz below

The cross sectional area (CSA) of controller cables should refer to Table 4-2, on page 18.
The controller should be derated if motor cables are too long or their CSA is too large. The current
should be decreased by 5% when per level of CSA is increased. If the CSA increase, so do the current to
ground and capacitance.

―30― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 4 Electrical Installation
4.5.4 Ground Connection
The grounding terminals PE must be connected to ground properly. The grounding cable should be as
short as possible (the grounding point should be as close to the controller as possible) and the
grounding area should be as large as possible. The grounding resistance should be less than 10Ω.
Do not share the grounding wire with other devices (A). HD30 can share grounding pole with other
devices (C). It achieves the best effect if HD30 and other devices use dedicated grounding poles (B), as
shown in Figure 4-14.

HD30 Other HD30 Other HD30 Other

PE PE PE PE PE PE

A. Sharing grounding wire B. Dedicated grounding pole C. Sharing grounding pole

Figure 4-14 Grounding method
When using more than one controller, be careful not to loop the ground wire as shown in Figure 4-15.

HD30 HD30 HD30 HD30

PE PE PE PE 4
Prohibited grounding method
Figure 4-15 Prohibited grounding method

4.5.5 EMI Filter

The EMI filter should be used in the equipment that may generate strong EMI or the equipment that is
sensitive to the external EMI. The EMI filter is a dual-way low pass filter through which lower frequency
current can flow while higher frequency current can hardly flow.
Function of EMI filter
1. The EMI filter ensures the equipment not only can satisfy the conducting emission and conducting
sensitivity in EMC standard but also can suppress the radiation of the equipment.
2. It can prevent the EMI generated by equipment from entering the power cable and the EMI
generated by power cable from entering equipment.
Common mistakes in using EMI filter
1. Too long the power cable is between the EMI filter and the inverter
The filter inside the cabinet should be located near to the input power source. The length of the power
cables should be as short as possible.
2. Too close the input and output cables of the EMI filter
The distance between input and output cables of the filter should be as far apart as possible.
Otherwise the high-frequency noise may be coupled between the cables and bypass the filter. Thus,
the filter will become ineffective.
3. Bad grounding of the EMI filter
The enclosure of EMI filter must be grounded properly to the metal case of the controller. In order to
achieve better grounding effect, make use of a special grounding terminal on the enclosure. If using
one cable to connect the filter to the case, the grounding is useless for high frequency interference.
When the frequency is high, so is the impedance of cable, hence there is little bypass effect.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―31―

Chapter 4 Electrical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
The correct installation: The filter should be mounted on the enclosure of equipment. Ensure to clear
away the insulation paint between the filter case and the enclosure for good grounding contact.

4.5.6 Countermeasures for Conduction, Radiation and Radio Frequency Interference

EMI of the inverter
The operating theory of inverter means that some EMI is unavoidable. The inverter is usually installed
in a metal cabinet which normally little affects the instruments outside the metal cabinet. The cables
are the main EMI source. If connect the cables according to this manual, the EMI can be suppressed
effectively.
If the inverter and other control equipment are installed in one cabinet, the area rule must be observed.
Pay attention to the isolation between different areas, cable layout and shielding.
Reducing conducted interference
Add a noise filter to suppress conducted interference on the output side. Additionally, conducted
interference can be efficiently reduced by threading all the output cables through a grounded metal
tube. And conducted interference can be dramatically decreased when the distance between the
output cables and the signal cables is above 0.3m.
Reducing RF interference
The I/O cables and the inverter produce radio frequency interference. A noise filter can be installed
both on the input side and output side, and shield them with iron utensil to reduce RF interference.
The wiring distance between the inverter and the motor should be as short as possible shown in
Figure 4-16.
MCCB Iron box Metal tube
X

～ X EMI filter Inverter EMI filter M

X

Figure 4-16 RF interference clearing

4.5.7 Reactor
AC input reactor
The purpose of installing an AC input reactor: to increase the input power factor; to dramatically
reduce the harmonics on the input side at the high voltage point of common coupling and prevent
input current unbalance which can be caused by the phase-to-phase unbalance of the power supply.
DC reactor
The installation of a DC reactor can increase the input power factor, improve the overall efficiency and
thermal stability of controller, substantially eliminate the upper harmonics influence on performance
of inverter, and decrease the conducted and radiated electromagnetic emissions from the inverter.
AC output reactor
When the length of cable between inverter and motor is more than 100m, it will cause leakage current
and controller tripping. It is suggested that user should consider installing an AC output reactor.

―32― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 5 Operation Instructions

Chapter 5 Operation Instructions

Danger
• Only when the terminal cover of HD30 has been fitted can you switch on AC power source. Do not remove the
cover after power is switched on.
• Ensure the motor and the mechnical device are in the use application before HD30 starts.
• To change the MCB, correctly set the parameters before operating.

Warning
• Do not check or detect the signal during HD30 running.
• Do not randomly change HD30 parameter setting.
• Please thoroughly complete all control debugging and testing, make all adjustments and conduct a full safety
assessment before switching the run command source of HD30.
• Do not touch the energy-depletion braking resistor due to the high temperature.

5.1 Function Description

5
Note:
In the following sections, you may encounter control, running and status of HD3L description many times.
Please read this section. It will help you to correctly understand and use the functions to be discussed.

5.1.1 Operation Mode

The physical channel: HD30 receives the run command (start, run, stop, jog, etc.), which can be
selected via F00.11 and DI terminals:
Operation Mode Description
With , , on the operation panel to start the inverter, stop, jog run
keypad
control.
control terminals Use the control terminal to start the inverter and stop the operation control.
SCIcommunicaiton Through the SCI communication drive start, stop running control.

5.1.2 Inverter Frequency Setting Source

The final setting frequency of the HD30 is calculated (F19.01) by the main setting channel (F00.10) and
the auxiliary setting channel (F19.00).
When the auxiliary setting channel is the same as the main setting channel (except analog), the
frequency is set by the main set channel.
Master setting frequency (F00.10) Auxiliary setting frequency (F19.00) Remark
/ 0: No auxiliary frequency channel
0: Keypad setting, F00.13 Set the initial 1: Keypad setting, F19.13 Set the initial
Keypad , adjust
value value

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―33―

Chapter 5 Operation Instructions Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Master setting frequency (F00.10) Auxiliary setting frequency (F19.00) Remark
1: Terminal setting, F00.13set initial 2: Terminal setting, F19.03set initial Terminal UP/DN adjust
2: SCI communicaiton set, initial value is 0 3: SCI communicaiton set, initial value 0
3: Analogue setting 4: Analogue setting
4: Terminal pulse setting 5: Terminal pulse setting DI6 terminals F15.05 set 53
/ 6: PID output setting
6 - 9: AI1 - AI4 setting 7 - 10: AI1 - AI4 setting
10: Keypad potentiometer setting 11: Keypad potentiometer setting

5.1.3 Inverter Status

Inverter Status Description
After the inverter is powered on, the inverter U / V / W terminal has no output and the operation
Stop status status indicator of the operation panel flashes if no operation command is input or the stop
command is executed during operation.
After the inverter receives the run command, the inverter U / V / W terminal starts to output, and
Run status
the operation status indicator of the operation panel is on.
Motor Set F08.06 / F13.17 = 1 or 2, HD30 will receive the run command then enter motor parameters
parameters auto-tuning status. If the auto-tuning process is completed, the inverter will enter into stop
auto-tuning status.
Refers to the inverter U / V / W terminal has output or zero frequency block output or sleep wait
and then restart the state.
System running
In this state, the operation status indicator of the operation panel is on, the LED flashes to
state
display the stop status parameter, and the parameters that can not be modified in the inverter
can not be modified.

5.1.4 Inverter Running Mode

Running Mode Description
In the keypad control mode, when key is pressed, the inverter will run at the jog
frequency (F00.15, F03.15 and F03.16 are required to set).
Jog In the terminal control mode, the DI terminal jog command (function 20 - 25) is received and
run according to the corresponding jog frequency (F00.15, F03.15, F03.16 and F05.21 are
required set).
The process PID adjustment operation function is valid (F04.00 = 1). The inverter will select the
process PID adjustment operation mode, that is, PID adjustment according to the setting and
Process PID
feedback amount (set F04 Group).
adjustment
• The process PID adjustment operation mode can be disabled by the DI terminal (function No.
33) to switch to other operation mode.
The multi - stage frequency 1 - 15 (F06.00 - F06.14) is selected for multi - step speed operation
MS SPEED
via the logical combination of DI terminal (function 13 - 16).
The simple PLC function selection is valid (F06.15 = 1). The inverter will run in simple PLC mode.
Simple PLC The inverter will run according to the preset operating parameters (see F06 Group parameter).
• The simple PLC operation mode can be paused by the DI terminal (function No. 30).
Wobble F07.00 = 1, the inverter will run in accordance with the pre-set operating parameters (see F07
operation Group parameter).

―34― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 5 Operation Instructions

5.2 Operating Instructions

5.2.1 Keypad
The standard HD30 are installed with LED keypad which is shown in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1 Key description of keypad
Key Description
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK
Entry or exit programming key

In the keypad control, press the key to jog run HD30

In the keypad control, press this key to run HD30

Hz A V RPM %

a. In the keypad control, press this key to stop HD30

b. In the detection fault, press this key to reset at fault
Set certain function by F00.12
PRG JOG Increase value or parameter

Decrease value or parameter

SHF ENT a. Select display parameter and shift bit
b. Stop in loop / Display the parameter during running
RUN STOP a. Enter lower menu
b. Confirm saving the data
5
The keypad consists of 5 status indicators and 5 unit indicators and shown as Table 5-2.
Table 5-2 Indicator description of the keypad
Mark Name : Lighting : Flashing : Lightless
HD30 is forward running The start of HD30 is forward
Forward status
at the moment running next time
HD30 is reverse running The start of HD30 is reverse
Reverse status
at the moment running next time
HD30 is faulty at the HD30 is well at the
Alarm status
moment moment
Remote / Local HD30 is in terminal HD30 is in communication HD30 is in keypad
status control mode control mode control mode
Password locked The user password lock There is no user
status of HD30 is avail password or unlocked
The unit of the present The present parameter is
Frequency unit
parameter is Hz output frequency
The unit of the present
Current unit
parameter is A
The unit of the current
Voltage unit
parameter is V
The unit of the present The present parameter is
Rotary speed unit
parameter is rpm rotary speed unit
The unit of the present
% unit
function parameter is %

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―35―

Chapter 5 Operation Instructions Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
The keypad of HD30 has five LED displays and their meanings are shown in Table 5-3.
Table 5-3 LED display description
LED display Meaning LED display Meaning LED display Meaning LED display Meaning

0 A J U

1 b L u

2 C n y

3 c o -

4 d P Point

5 E q Full display

6 F r No display

Flash
7 H S
modifiable

8 h T

9 i t

5.2.2 Display Status

Parameter display status at stop/run
When HD30 is in stop/run status, the keypad will display stop or run status and its parameters, as
shown in Figure 5-1.
Other parameters (F18.08 - F18.13) or F18.02 - F18.07 can be displayed by pressing .
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Figure 5-1 Display status of stop (left) and run (right)

―36― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 5 Operation Instructions
Function parameter editing status
At stop, run or fault alarm status, press to enter function parameter editing status (see the
description of parameter F01.00 and the user password unlock and modify of section 5.2.3), as shown
in Figure 5-2.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Figure 5-2 Parameter editing status

Fault alarm status

If the inverter detects a fault signal, the keypad will enter the FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK
fault alarm status and flashing display the fault code, as
shown in Figure 5-3.
You can enter F20.21 - F20.37 to check the fault history.
The inverter can be reset by pressing key, or by Hz A V RPM %

sending the reset commands via the control terminal or

Figure 5-3 Fault alarm status
communication reset port. 5
Special display status
The special display status includes the setting and unlocked password status, upload and download
parameter, power on initialization, parameter auto-tuning, keypad self-check and restored factory
settings, as shown in Figure 5-4.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Unlock success PW has been cleared PW set successfully Parameter auto-tuning

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Copy para. to MCB Copy para. to keypad Failed to copy para Reset
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

DC bus under-voltage Initializing keypad self-check success keypad self-check error

Figure 5-4 Special display status

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―37―

Chapter 5 Operation Instructions Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
5.2.3 Keypad Operation Examples
Four-level menu switching operation
The keypad uses four-level menu configuration for parameter setting or other operations.
Configuring mode can be displayed in 4-level menu: mode setting (first-level)→function parameter
Group setting (second-level)→function parameter setting (third-level)→parameter setting
(fourth-level). The operation process is shown in Figure 5-5 and the description of the keys is shown in
Table 5-4.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

PRG

Hz A V RPM % PRG Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Stop status First-level menu First-level menu

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

PRG Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % PRG

Second-level menu Second-level menu

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Third-level menu Third-level menu

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % PRG Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Fourth-level menu Third-level menu Third-level menu

Figure 5-5 Four-level operation process
Table 5-4 Switching four-level description of the key
Key First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Fourth-level menu
Fault, return to fault
Do not save the present
display; Fault cleared, Return to second-level
Return to first-level menu value and return to
return to run or stop menu
third-level
status display
Enter to second-level Save the present value
Enter to third-level menu Enter to fourth-level menu
menu and return to third-level
Select function Modify the internal No. of Modify function value.
Modify No. function.
Group. function Group. Increase Increase by 1 according
Increase by 1 when press
Cycle according to by 1 according to the to the present modified
this key one time
d-F-U-y present modified bit bit

―38― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 5 Operation Instructions
Key First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Fourth-level menu
Select function Modify the internal No. of Modify function value.
Modify No. function.
Group. function Group. Decrease Decrease by 1 according
Decrease by 1 when
Cycle according to by 1 according to the to the present modified
press this key one time
y-U-F-d present modified bit bit
Switch units , ten
Invalid Invalid Switch units and tens thousands, thousands,
hundreds, tens

Parameter setting
For example: To modify the setting value of the F02.14 from 000.00Hz to 012.00Hz, refer to Figure 5-6.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Third-level menu Fourth-level menu Shift to units

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

5
Shift to tens Modify value
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

PRG

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Modify value Third-level menu

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

PRG PRG

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Stop status First-level menu Second-level menu

Figure 5-6 Parameter setting
When setting fourth-level menu, if the parameter is not in anti-color displaying, it indicates that this
parameter can’t be modified. The possible reasons are as follows:
• The function parameter can’t be modified, such as the actual detected parameters or recorded
parameters etc.
• Only when the controller stops can the function parameter be modified.
• Only input the correct password can it edit the function parameter due to the valid password.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―39―

Chapter 5 Operation Instructions Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Switching display parameters at stop status
The keypad can display six stop parameters (F18.08 - F18.13) in loop. Take the default parameter as an
example, Figure 5-7 shows the switching process at stop status.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Setting frequency DC bus voltage AI1 input voltage

F18.08 = 7 F18.09 = 18 F18.10 = 20
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Output terminal status Input terminal status AI2 input voltage

F18.13 = 44 F18.12 = 43 F18.11 = 22
Figure 5-7 Switching display parameters at stop status

Unlock user’s password

F01.00 = non-zero, press key to exit to stop / run display status, or detect no press on the keypad
for 5 minutes, the user’s password will be valid. The indicator of keypad will be lighting.
The operation of unlock user’s password is as shown in Figure 5-8 which takes 4 as the user’s password.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Third-level menu Fourth-level menu Set password

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

1.5s later

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Third-level menu Unlock password success

Figure 5-8 Operation of unlocking user’s password

―40― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 5 Operation Instructions
Modify user’s password
If no password, directly modify the value of F01.00 according to Figure 5-9.
If there is password, unlock the password according to Figure 5-8. When the lock successfully displays
“F01.01”, you can set a new password according to Figure 5-9 which takes “02004” as the new password.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Third-level menu Third-level menu Fourth-level menu

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Shifting Modify password

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

1.5s later

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Modify password Modify password success Third-level menu 5

Figure 5-9 Operation of modifying user’s password

Clear user’s password

If there is password, unlock according to Figure 5-8. When unlock successfully, the keypad displays
“F01.01”, clear the user’s password according to Figure 5-10.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz VA RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Third-level menu Third-level menu Fourth-level menu

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

1.5s later

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Third-level menu Clear password success

Figure 5-10 Operation of clearing user’s password

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―41―

Chapter 5 Operation Instructions Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Parameter copy
The parameters are copied from the control panel to the operator panel:
When F01.03 = 1/2, the keypad will display “UPLd”. When the upload is finished, the keypad will jump
to display F01.00.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM %

Copied to keypad
Figure 5-11 Parameter copied to keypad
Parameters are copied from the operator panel to the control board:
When F01.02 = 2/3 or F01.02 = 5/6, the keypad will display “dnLd”. When the download is finished, the
keypad will jump to display F01.03.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Copied to control board Copy failed

Figure 5-12 Parameter copied to control board
Note:
1. When downloading parameters, it displays “dFAiL” which means that the EEPROM storage parameters of
keypad do not match with function parameters of HD30.
First, upload the setting value of the correct function code to the EEPROM of keypad, and then download.
2. When copying parameters, the keypad is flashing to display “E0022” which represents that the EEPROM of
keypad is fault. It will jump to next function code for 10 seconds later. The troubleshooting is in 7.1 (on
page 109).

5.3 Initial Power On

It needs carefully check before power is on. Please wire the inverter according to the specifications
supplied by this manual.
After checking the wiring and mains supply voltage, switch on the circuit breaker and the inverter will
be initialization. The keypad will display as shown in Figure 5-13.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Firstly display Then display Stop status

Figure 5-13 Display initialing keypad

―42― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction

Chapter 6 Function Introduction

This chapter will provide user with detail function introduction of each Group.
Display Parameters:
d00: Status Display Parameters (on pages 44 - 47)
General Function Parameters:
F00: Basic Parameter (on pages 47 - 50)
F01: Protection of Parameters (on pages 50 - 53)
F02: Run / Stop Control Parameters (on pages 53 - 56)
F03: Acc. / Dec. Parameters (on pages 56 - 57)
F04: Process PID Control (on pages 57 - 60)
F05: External Reference Curve Parameters (on pages 60 - 62)
F06: MS SPEED and Simple PLC (on pages 62 - 65)
F07: Wobble Operation Parameters (on pages 65 - 66)
F08: Asyn. Motor 1 Parameters (on pages 66 - 68)
F09: V/f Control Parameters (on pages 68 - 70)
F10: Motor 1 Vector Control Speed-loop Parameters (on pages 70 - 71)
F11: Motor 1 Vector Control Current Loop Parameter (on page 71 - 72)
F13: Asyn. Motor 2 Parameters (on pages 72 - 75)
F15: Digital I/O Terminal Parameters (on pages 75 - 87)
6
F16: Analogue I/O Terminal Parameters (on pages 87 - 91)
F17: SCI Communication Parameters (on pages 91 - 92)
F18: Display Control Parameters (on pages 92 - 93)
F19: Function-boost Parameters (on pages 93 - 101)
F20: Protection of Fault Parameters (on pages 101 - 105)
F21: Torque Control Parameters (on pages105 - 106)
F23: PWM Control Parameters (on pages 106 - 106)
User Setting Parameters:
Group U: User Menu Mode Display Parameters (on pages 107 - 107)
Manufacturer Function Parameters (on page 107)

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―43―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.

6.1 Group d: Display Parameters

Group d is status display parameters. The users can directly check the status parameters by checking
the function code of Group d.
6.1.1 d00: Status Display Parameters
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
d00.00 Series of the inverter [Actual value]
d00.01 Software version of the control board [Actual value]
d00.03 Special software version of the control board [Actual value]
d00.05 Software version of the keypad [Actual value]
d00.06 Customized series No. [Actual value]
d00.07 Motor and control mode [Actual value]
Display the current motor and the control mode.
Units: Display the current driving motor Tens: Control mode
• 0: Motor 1. • 0: V/f contorl without PG.
• 1: Motor 2. • 2: Vector control without PG.
d00.08 Rated current of the inverter [Actual value]
d00.10 Inverter status [Actual value]
Display the inverter status, as shown in the following table:
Current limiting Stall overvoltage
Thousands Unused Unused 0: In 0: In
1: Not in 1: Not in
Speed limiting
Parameter
Bit11: Control mode value
auto-tuning
Hundreds 0: Speed control 0: Not in the Unused
0: No auto-tuning
1: Torque control limiting
1: Auto-tuning
1: In the limiting
DC braking Bit1&Bit0: Acc. / Dec./ constant
Tens 0: Non-DC braking status Unused 00: Constant 01: Acc.
1: In DC braking 11: Constant 10: Dec.
Zero speed running
Forward/reverse Bit1: Run/stop Bit0: Inverter fault
0: In non-zero speed
Units 0: Forward 0: Stop 0: No fault
runing
1: Reverse 1: Run 1: Fault
1: In zero speed running
123
d00.11 Master setting frequency source [Actual value]
0: Keypad set. 6 - 9: AI1 - AI4 set.
1: Terninal set. 10: Keypad potentiometer set.
2: Communicaiton set. 11: PID.
3: Analogue set. 12: Multi-speed.
4: Terminal pulse set. 13: PLC.
d00.12 Master setting frequency (Hz) [Actual value]
d00.13 Auxiliary setting frequency (Hz) [Actual value]
d00.14 Setting frequency (Hz) [Actual value]
d00.15 Reference frequency (after Acc. / Dec.) (Hz) [Actual value]
Display the reference frequency for the change of the Acc. / Dec..

―44― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
d00.16 Output frequency (Hz) [Actual value]
d00.17 Setting RPM (rpm) [Actual value]
d00.18 Running RPM (rpm) [Actual value]
d00.20 Output voltage (V) [Actual value]
d00.21 Output current (A) [Actual value]
d00.22 Torque given (%) [Actual value]
Display torque pro-given, the percentage of rated torque.
d00.23 Output torque (%) [Actual value]
Display output torque which is the relative percentage of the motor rated torque.
d00.24 Output power (kW) [Actual value]
Display the present actual output power.
d00.25 DC bus voltage (V) [Actual value]
d00.26 Potentiometer input voltage of the keypad (%) [Actual value]
Display potentiometer input voltage of the keypad.
d00.27 AI1 input voltage (%) [Actual value]
Display AI1 input voltage.
d00.28 AI1 input voltage (after disposal) (%) [Actual value]
Display A1 input voltage which is disposed by the gain, bias, analogue curve and filter.
d00.29 AI2 input voltage (%) [Actual value]
Display AI2 input voltage. Display input voltage/current of AI2 after handling by filter.
• When AI2 selects voltage input, -100.0% corresponds -10V, and 100.0% corresponds 10V.
• When AI2 selects current input, 0.0% corresponds 0mA, and 100.0% corresponds 20mA.
d00.30 AI2 input voltage (after disposal) (%) [Actual value] 6
Display input voltage/current after gain and bias treatment.
• Cooresponding relation see d00.29.
d00.31 AI3 input voltage (%) [Actual value]
Display input voltage/current of AI3 after filter.
• Select HD30-EIO extension card, AI3 is corresponds AI3 of HD30-EIO.
• When AI3 selects voltage input, -100.0% corresponds -10V, and 100.0% corresponds 10V.
• When AI3 selects current input, 0.0% corresponds 0mA, and 100.0% corresponds 20mA.
• Select HD30-PIO extension card, AI3 corresponds channel 1 of HD30-PIO card.
• When voltage input is selected as channel 1, 0V corresponds 0.0%, 24V corresponds 100.0%.
• When current input is selected as channel 1, 0A corresponds 0.0%, 1A corresponds 100.0%.
d00.32 AI3 input voltage (after disposal) (%) [Actual value]
Display AI3 input voltage/current after gaining and offseting.
• Cooresponding relation see d00.31.
d00.33 AI4 input voltage (%) [Actual value]
Display input voltage/current of AI4 after filter.
• Select HD30-EIO extension card, AI4 is corresponds AI4 of HD30-EIO.
• When AI4 selects voltage input, -100.0% corresponds -10V, and 100.0% corresponds 10V.
• When AI4 selects current input, 0.0% corresponds 0mA, and 100.0% corresponds 20mA.
• Select HD30-PIO extension card, AI4 corresponds channel 2 of HD30-PIO card.
• When voltage input is selected as channel 2, 0V corresponds 0.0%, 24V corresponds 100.0%.
• When current input is selected as channel 2, 0A corresponds 0.0%, 1A corresponds 100.0%.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―45―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
d00.34 AI4 input voltage (after disposal) (%) [Actual value]
Shows the gain, offset after the AI4 input voltage / current.
• Correspondence is shown in d00.33.
d00.35 DI6 terminal pulse input frequency (Hz) [Actual value]
d00.36 AO1 output (%) [Actual value]
When AO1 selects voltage output, 0.0% corresponds 0V, and 100.0% corresponds 10V.
When AO1 selects 0 - 20mA current input, 0.0% corresponds 0mA, and 100.0% corresponds 20mA.
When AO1 selects 4 - 20mA current input, 0.0% corresponds 4mA, and 100.0% corresponds 20mA.
• 4 - 20mA current output parameter setting see F16.22, F16.23.
d00.37 AO2 output (%) [Actual value]
Correspondence is the same as AO1, see d00.36.
d00.38 High-speed output pulse frequency (Hz) [Actual value]
d00.39 Heatsink temperature (℃) [Actual value]
d00.40 Setting line speed [Actual value]
d00.41 Reference line speed [Actual value]
d00.44 Process PID reference (%) [Actual value]
Display process PID reference relative to full scale (10.00V) percentage.
d00.45 Process PID feedback (%) [Actual value]
Display process PID feedback relative to full scale (10.00V) percentage.
d00.46 Process PID tolerance (%) [Actual value]
Display process PID tolerance relative to full scale (10.00V) percentage.
d00.47 Process PID integral item (%) [Actual value]
Display process PID integral item relative to full scale (10.00V) percentage.
d00.48 Process PID output (%) [Actual value]
Display process PID output to full scale (10.00V) percentage.
d00.49 External counting value [Actual value]
d00.50 Input terminal status [Actual value]
Display input terminal status. Each bit (binary) of this function parameter stands for different physical
sources which are in the below table.
• 0: The input terminals are disconnected with corresponding common terminals.
• 1: The input terminals are connected with corresponding common terminals.
Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bit8 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
- - - DI9 DI8 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1
123
Note: Only when using HD30-EIO will the DI7 - DI9 be enabled.
d00.51 Output terminal status [Actual value]
Display output terminal status. Each bit (binary) of this function parameter stands for different physical
sources which are in the below table.
• 0: The output terminals are disconnected with corresponding common terminals.
• 1: The output terminals are connected with corresponding common terminals.
Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
- - RLY4 RLY3 RLY2 RLY1 DO2 DO1
123
Note: Only when using HD30-EIO will the RLY2 - RLY4 be enabled.

―46― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
d00.52 MODBUS communication status [Actual value]
Display MODBUS communication status.
0: Normal.
1: Communication timeout.
4: Incorrect data frame content.
d00.53 Actual length (m) [Actual value]
d00.54 Total length (km) [Actual value]
d00.55 Total time at power-on (h) [Actual value]
d00.56 Total time at operation (h) [Actual value]
d00.57 High bit of motor total energy consumption (k km.h) [Actual value]
d00.58 Low bit of motor total energy consumption (km.h) [Actual value]
d00.59 High bit of energy consumption at this time running (k km.h) [Actual value]
d00.60 Low bit of energy consumption at this time running (km.h) [Actual value]
d00.61 Present fault [Actual value]
Displaying 100 means the undervoltage.

6.2 Group F: General Function Parameters

6.2.1 F00: Basic Parameters
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F00.00 Control mode selection 0,1 [0]
0: Speed control.
1: Torque control. 6
• Torque control is valid only when the motor control mode is selected for PG vector control (F00.01 /
F13.00 = 2).
• Refer to Group F15 DI terminal (56, 57) function description and Group F21 torque control parameter
description for details of torque control.
F00.01 Motor 1 control mode selection 0 - 2 [0]
0: V/f control without PG. Constant voltage/frequency ratio control.
• It is specially applicable for occasions when one inverter drives more than one motors to achieve
proper efficiency.
• When select V/f control, please properly set the V/f control parameter of Group F09 or Group F13 to
achieve proper efficiency.
2: Vector control without PG. Sensorless vector control.
• It is applicable for application with high requirement on inverter performance and torque.
• At first, it must perform motor parameter auto-tuning. And then adjust the settings of F08.00 - F08.04
according to the nameplate of the motor. Start the motor parameter auto-tuning function and
properly set Group F10 parameters, so as to achieve excellent vector control efficiency.
F00.02 Inverter type setting 0,1 [0]
0: G type, to drive heavy and general motor.
1: P type, to drive pump and fan.
F00.03 Motor selection 0,1 [0]
0: Motor 1.
1: Motor 2.
Note: It can preset two Group motor parameters. At stop they can shift even without input parameters when they
are respectively driving two motors.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―47―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F00.04 HD30 general extension option selection 0 - 3 [0]
0: Option is invalid.
1: HD30-EIO is valid.
3: HD30-PIO is valid.
Note: The extension function can be used with the corresponding option.
F00.06 Inverter maximum output frequency 50.00 - 400.00 [50.00Hz]
It defines the highest frequency that the inverter is allowed to output.
• The max. frequency of V/f control is 400Hz and the max. frequency for vector control is 200Hz.
• It is necessary to set them according to the nameplate of the controlled motor and actual operating
conditions.
F00.07 Upper limit of operation frequency setting source 0 - 7 [0]
It defines the highest frequency that the user is set to operate, and select different setting sources to set the
upper limit frequency by F00.07.
0: Digital setting. Set the upper limit frequency by F00.08.
1: Analogue input AI setting. See Group F16.
2: Terminal pulse setting. F16.17 sets the max. pulse input frequency according to F00.06 (inverter max.
output frequency).
3 - 6: AI1 - AI4 set.
7: Keypad potentiometer setting.
F00.08 Upper limit of operation frequency 0.00 - F00.06 [50.00Hz]
When F00.07 = 0, the upper limit frequency is set by F00.08.
F00.09 Lower limit of operation frequency 0.00 - F00.08 [0.00Hz]
Use F00.09 to limit the actual output frequency. When the setting frequency value is bigger than the zero
frequency threshold (F19.10) but smaller than F00.09, it will operate at lower limit frequency.
• Please properly set the parameters according to the nameplate of the motor and actual operating
conditions.
• No limitation on the motor parameter auto-tuning function.
• Besides the lower and upper limit of frequency, the inverter’s running frequency is also limited by the
parameter settings of start/stop DWELL frequency (F02.02, F02.14), zero frequency threshold (F19.10),
stop DC braking starting frequency (F02.16) and skip frequency (F05.17, F05.18, F05.19) etc.
F00.10 Frequency setting sources selection 0 - 10 [0]
0: Display panel digital setting. Change the value by pressing the or key of the keypad. Initial value
is set by F00.13.
1: Terminal digital setting. Change the value by using the terminals UP/DN. F00.13 sets initial value.
2: SCI communication setting. Chang the setting frequency by SCI communication frequency command.
• The initial value of the SCI communication frequency is 0.
3: AI analogue setting. It is set by the analogue input voltage.
• See Group F16.
• The corresponding relationship between the analogue value of AI1 and the inverter’s running
frequency setting is refered to Group F05.
4: Terminal pulse setting. It is set by the terminal pulse DI6.
• Refered to Group F05 for the corresponding relationship between the pulse terminal frequency and
the inverter’s running frequency setting.
6 - 9: AI1 – AI4 set.
10: Keypad potentiometer setting.

―48― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F00.11 Command setting source selection 0 - 2 [0]
0: Display panel running source. Start and stop the inveter by pressing the key , , .
1: Terminal running source. Start and stop by using the corresponding external terminals.
• External terminal FWD (multi-function terminal is set to 2), REV (multi-function terminal is set to 3),
JOGF1 (multi-function terminal is set to 20), JOGR1 (multi-function terminal is set to 21), JOGF2
(multi-function terminal is set to 22), JOGR2 (multi-function terminal is set to 23). For more information
please see Group F15.
2: SCI communication running source. Start and stop by SCI communication port according to
communication protocol.
F00.12 Function selection of the multi-function key 0 - 3 [2]
0: Switch the keypad running direction. Switch the keypad running direction by key.
• When F00.11 = 0, it is valid. Do not save when power is off.
• The operation direction can only be switched when the operation panel is in the status parameter
display.
1: Switch local and remote control. Switch the local and remote control by key.
• LOCAL when running the command channel is keypad command channel (F00.11 = 0).
• REMOTE When the command channel is a command channel other than keypad (F00.11 = 1, 2).
• Run command channel priority: Local remote switch > DI terminal (9, 10, 11 function) determine
command channel > F00.11 set command channel.
Running command channel Operate mode

Determined by Terminal Terminal Keypad Terminal

both F00.11 and
DI terminal SCI comm- Comm- Comm-
unicaiton Keypad
unicaiton unicaiton
• LO/RE indicator:
6
Lit: Indicates that the current drive is in the terminal running command channel.
Blinking: Indicates that the current drive is in the communication run command channel.
Off: Indicates that the current drive is in the operator panel running command channe.
2: The multi-function key is invalid.
3: U group shortcut menu.
F00.13 Starting frequency digital setting 0.00 - upper limit [50.00Hz]
When F00.10 = 0 or 1, F00.13 start to set the initial frequency value.
F00.14 Frequency setting control 000 - 111 [1001]
Only when F00.11 = 0 or 1 will it be valid.
• The current setting frequency value will be replaced by a new one when the value of the F00.13 has be
changed by the parameter setting.
Units: Frequency setting save selection at power Thousands: Switch the frequency channel to the
outage analogue selection
• 0: Not stored when power down. • 0: Not saved.
• 1: Storage when power down. • 1: Save. When the frequency setting channel is
Tens: Frequency setting control selection at stop switched from panel setting to terminal digital
• 0: Set frequency at stop. setting, and then switch back to panel setting, the
• 1: Set the frequency to F00.13 when stopping. panel setting frequency remains the last changed
frequency.
Hundreds: Communication setting frequency
storage selection
• 0: Not stored when power down.
• 1: Storage when power down.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―49―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F00.15 Jog operation frequency digital setting 1 0.00 - upper limit [5.00Hz]
F00.16 Interval of jog operation 0.0 - 100.0 [0.0s]
After cancel the jog command, the inverter will Frequency
not respond to the jog command at the interval of Jog running
jog operation set by F00.16. frequency
Time
• After the interval of jog is completed, it
immediately execute the arrived jog command. Acc Dec
F00.16
As show in figure.
Jog command Time

F00.17 Operation direction selection 0,1 [0]

0: The same as run command.
1: Opposite to run command.
F00.18 Anti-reverse operation 0,1 [0]
This function will be valid when F00.11 = 0,1,2.
0: Reverse operation is permitted.
1: Reverse operation is prohibitted.
• The inverter only responds to the forward run command. If the frequency is set to negative at this time,
the inverter will run at zero frequency.
• The inverter does not respond to the reverse command. If the reverse command is received in the
operating state, the inverter will stop and stop immediately.
• When the PLC is running in the reverse direction of the setting section, the inverter will decelerate to
zero frequency operation until the positive direction is running.
F00.19 Dead time of direction switch 0.0 - 3600.0 [0.0s]
F00.19 defines the dead time of direction switch, namely, the time of zero-frequency output in the process
of direction switch shown as the right figure.
F00.20 Key enable of optional keypad 0,1 [0]
0: Enabled. When the inverter connects to two keypads, the keys of optional display using the
communication port can be operated.
1: Invalid. When the inverter connects to two keypads, the keys of optional display using the
communication port can not be operated.
F00.21 Dormant function selection 0,1 [0]
0: Disabled. This function is invalid.
1: Enabled.
F00.22 Dormancy wake up time 0.0 - 6000.0 [1.0s]
F00.24 Sleep delay time 0.0 - 6000.0 [1.0s]
F00.25 Sleep frequency 0.00 - upper limit [0.00Hz]
F00.21 - F00.25 can realize functions of sleep and wake up.
• With running command and it is in sleep state, After setting the frequency ≥ F00.25, after the time F00.22
(sleep wake-up time), the inverter will exit the dormant state and start to start;
• During operation, when set frequency < F00.25, the inverter enters the sleep state (the operation
indicator is on and the LED flashes) and stops after the elapsed time F00.24 (sleep delay time).

―50― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F00.26 Action selection for inverter running at zero frequency 000 - 332 [111]
Unit: When running is controlled by V/f, action Ten: Zero frequency action selection in open loop
selection of zero frequency vector running
• 0: No treatment. Hundreds: Zero frequency action selection in
• 1: Inverter lock output. torque control
• 2: Inverter run in DC brake. • 0: No treatment.
• 1: Inverter lock output.
• 2: Inverter run in DC brake.
• 3: The frequency converter is operated by
pre-excitation.
F00.27 Command source binding frequency source selection 000 - ddd [000]
Only valid for the main frequency, when the command source has a binding frequency source, the
command source is valid, F00.10 the frequency source is invalid.
Unit: panel command binding frequency source selection
Ten: Terminal command Binding frequency source selection
Hundreds: communication command binding frequency source selection
• 0: No binding. • 8: AI2 setting.
• 1: Keypa digital setting. • 9: AI3 setting.
• 2: Terminal digital setting. • A: AI4 setting.
• 3: SCI communicaiton setting. • b: Keypad potentiometer setting.
• 5: Terminal pulse setting. • C: PID setting.
• 7: AI1 setting. • d: Multi-speed setting.
F00.28 Functions selection of button STOP 0,1 [0]
0: Only valid in control of keypad.
1: Valid in all control mode.
6

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―51―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
6.2.2 F01: Protection of Parameters
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F01.00 User’s password 00000 - 65535 [00000]
XXXXX: To enable the password protection function, set any non-zero number as the password.
• Once the password is set, if you want to change any parameter you must input correct password.
Otherwise, all the parameters cannot be changed but only read.
• When input correct password, by pressing the key to exit to stop/run display status or by
detecting that there is no press on the keypad within 5 minutes, the user’s password will be valid. It is
necessary to input correct password if you want to change parameters. It will restart when there is no
press on the keypad within 5 minutes.
00000: The factory setting of F01.00 is 00000, namely the password protection function is disabled.
• If the user unlocks the password, it means clearing the user’s password.
• To unlock, change and clear the user’s password, see section 5.2.3.
F01.01 Menu mode selection 000 - 111 [010]
Units:
• 0: Full menu mode. All function parameters can be displayed in this menu.
• 1: Checking menu mode. Only different from factory setting parameters can be displayed.
Tens:
• 0: Does not lock the parameter mapping relationship of Group U and Group F.
• 1: Lock the parameter mapping relationship of Group U and Group F.
Hundred:
• 0: After password protection, Group F and U parameters can be read.
• 1: After password protection, Group F and U parameters are prohibited from reading.
F01.02 Function code parameter initialization (download) 0 - 6 [0]
0: No operation. The inverter is in regular parameter read/write status.
• Whether can change the parameter it depends on the user’s
Keypad
password status and the actual operating conditions.
1: Restore to factory settings. Upload
• Except F01.00, F01.02, F01.03, Group F08, F13.01 - F13.15, F19.15, HD30 present setting
F19.19, F19.24, F20.08, F20.09, F20.21 - F20.37, F23.00 and Group y. function parameter
F01.03 = 1/2
• Operation steps: If set F01.02 = 1, press to ensure and the
parameters are restored to factory settings. The keypad dispalys
Inverter
“rESEt”. Then the keypad will display parameters in stop status after
finish restoring to factory setting.
2,3: Download the keypad EEPROM parameter 1 / 2 to the current function code settings.
4: Clear fault information. The fault history of F20.21 - F20.37 will be clear.
5,6: Download the keypad EEPROM parameter 1 / 2 to the current function code settings (including the
motor parameters).
Note: F01.00, F01.02, F01.03, F20.21 - F20.37 and Group y do not upload or download.
F01.03 Display panel EEPROM parameter initialization (upload) 0 - 2 [0]
0: No operation. The inverter is in regular parameter read/write status.
1,2: Upload the current function code settings to the keypad EEPROM Keypad
parameter 1 / 2.
Download
Keypad stored
Note: F01.00, F01.02, F01.03, F20.21 - F20.37 and Group y do not upload or function parameter
download. F01.02 = 2 / 3 / 5 / 6

Inverter

―52― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
6.2.3 F02: Run / Stop Control Parameters
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F02.00 Start mode selection 0 - 2 [0]
0: From the DWELL frequency to start.
• Refer to F02.02 and F02.03 parameters for the start DWELL frequency.
Frequency
F02.02
Forward F00.19 F02.03 Time
0
F02.01 F02.03
F02.02 Reverse

1: Brake first and then start from DWELL frequency.

• Refer to F02.04 and F02.05 parameters for the DC braking.
• Starting DC braking is enabled only in the process from the stop status to running status. But it is
disabled in the process of direction switch, as shown in the figure. There is no F02.05 (DC braking time)
when reverse.
Frequency
F02.02
Forward F00.19 F02.03 Time
0
F02.01 F02.05 F02.03
F02.02 Reverse

2: Start after speed tracking. If the result of speed tracking is smaller than F02.02, it will start from the
starting DWELL frequency.
• The inverter automatically searches and catches the motor’s running direction and speed, and starts
the rotating motor smoothly without impact. As the right figure. 6
• This mode is enabled only in the process from stop status to running status. But it is disabled in the
process of direction switch.
Motor free rotaiton
Motor rotation
Rotation setting
0
Recognize motor speed
Inverter running and direction
command
Frequency setting
Inverter running
frequency
Inverter running Positive direction
direciton
Oppositive direction
F02.01 Starting delay time 0.00 - 10.00 [0.00s]
When the inverter receives the run command, it will wait for the delay time set by F02.01 and then start
running.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―53―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F02.02 Start DWELL frequency setting 0.00 - upper limit [0.00Hz]
F02.03 Retention time of starting DWELL frequency 0.00 - 10.00 [0.00s]
When starting, temporarily keep the output frequency to prevent the motor into a stall state.
When it is loaded with a brake, when the brake is operating slowly, in order to prevent friction from the
brake, use DWELL function to accelerate after the brake is fully opened.
• During Acc., when the given frequency matches the
Frequency
frequency set by F02.02, the output frequency is
Frequency set
maintained at the time set in F02.03 and continues to
accelerate. Given
frequency
• Set F02.02 or F02.03 as 0, the starting DWELL frequency is F02.02
Time
disabled.
Note: Torque control, process PID / auxiliary set process PID,
F02.03
simple PLC and wobble , DWELL function is invalid.
F02.04 DC braking current setting 0 100 (inverter’s rated
current) [50%]
F02.05 DC braking time at start 0.00 - 60.00 [0.50s]
F02.04 is a percentage of the inverter’s rated current. Out frequency
To set the current value of the DC braking at start Running frequency
and at stop.
Time
• If setting is higher than fivefold of motor’s rated
current, the injection current value is fivefold of Out voltage
(effective value)
the motor’s rated current.
• The DC braking current is valid to both start and DC braking value
stop DC braking.
Time

F02.05 = 0.0s, there is no DC braking process at start. F02.05

• Only when F02.00 = 1 will F02.05 be enabled. Run command

F02.06 Faster tracking results compensation value 0.000 - 2.000 [0.000Hz]

F02.13 Stop mode selection 0 - 2 [0]
0: Decelerate to stop.
• After the stop command is received, the inverter reduces its output frequency according to the Dec.
time. When the frequency decreases to F02.14 and holds on a time F02.15 set, it will stop.
• Refer to the parameter F02.14 and F02.15 in the figure.
1: Coast to stop.
• After the stop command is received, the inverter stops output immediately and the motor stops under
the effects of mechanical inertia.
2: Decelerate to stop with DC braking.
• After the stop command is received, the inverter reduces its output frequency according to the Dec.
time and starts DC braking when its output frequency reaches F02.16 setting frequency.
• Refers to parameter F02.16 - F02.18 in the figure for the DC braking at stop.
• Refers to parameter F03.00 - F03.08 for the Dec. time.

―54― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F02.14 DWELL frequency setting at stop 0.00 - upper limit [0.00Hz]
F02.15 Retention time of DWELL frequency at stop 0.00 - 10.00 [0.00s]
F02.14 defines inverter’s DWELL frequency at stop. Frequency
Given
F02.15 is a holding time DWELL frequency at stop (F02.14) Frequency set frequency
in inverter stop process.

F02.14
• Only when F02.13 = 0 will it be enabled. Time
• Set F02.14 or F02.15 as 0, DWELL frequency at stop is
disabled. F02.15
F02.16 DC braking initial frequency at stop 0.00 - 50.00 [0.50Hz]
F02.17 DC braking waiting time at stop 0.00 - 10.00 [0.00s]
F02.18 DC braking time at stop 0.00 - 60.00 [0.50s]
F02.17 is the interval from A to B in the right Out frequency
figure during Dec. stop process.
Running frequency
• The inverter has no output during the
waiting time. By F02.17 setting the waiting
time, the current overshoot in the initial F02.16 A Time
stage (point B in the figure ) of braking can
be reduced when the inverter drives a high Out voltage
power motor. (effective value)
• By F02.04 setting the DC braking current at
stop. DC braking value
A B
F02.18 = 0.00s, there is no DC braking process at Time
stop.
F02.17F02.18
• Only when F02.13 = 2 will F02.16 - F02.18 be
Run command 6
enabled.
F02.19 Jog control mode 00 - 11 [10]
Units:
0: The jog functions of start and stop mode etc are invalid.
• In jog running, start mode set by F02.00 and stop mode set by F02.13 are invalid. When the jog
command is valid, the inverter starts up and running. When the jog command is invalid, the inverter
will decelerate and stop.
1: The jog functions of start and stop mode etc are enabled.
• In jog running, inverter will run in start mode set by F02.00 and stop mode set by F02.13.
Tens:
0: Terminal jog is not preferred.
• Terminal control operation does not respond to terminal jog command.
1: Terminal jog priority.
F02.20 Pre-excitation time 0.00 - 0.50 [0.50s]
Pre-excitation effect: Before the motor rotation, establish the motor flux, in order to obtain faster Acc.
performance.
• This function only takes effect in open loop vector control mode. It is recommended that F02.20 value be
not less than 0.10s.
• F02.20 = 0.00s, the pre-excitation function is disabled.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―55―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
6.2.4 F03: Acc. / Dec. Parameters
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F03.00 Acc. / Dec. mode selection 00 -11 [00]
Unit: Mode selection of Ace. and Dec.
0: Linear Acc. or Dec..
• Output frequency increases or decreases according to the constant slope.
1: S-curve Acc. or Dec..
• Output frequency increases or decelerases according to the S-curve.
• T5 is the setting Acc. time, T7 is the actual Acc. time. T6 is the setting Dec. time, T8 is the actual Dec.
time.
Frequency Frequency
F00.06 F00.06
T1：F03.11
T2：F03.12
T3：F03.13
T4：F03.14
Time Time
0 0
Acc. time Dec. time T1 T2 T3 T4
T5 T6
T7 T8
Ten: Acc. / Dec. time reference frequency adjustment
0: Maximum frequency (F00.06).
1: Set frequency.
F03.01 Acc. time 1 0.1 - 6000.0
F03.02 Dec. time 1 [15kW and below inverter:
F03.03 Acc. time 2 10.0s]
F03.04 Dec. time 2 [18.5 - 55kW interter :30.0s]
F03.05 Acc. time 3 [75kW and above inverter:
F03.06 Dec. time 3 60.0s]

F03.07 Acc. time 4

F03.08 Dec. time 4
Acc. time is the time required for inverter to accelerate from zero frequency to the reference frequency in a
straight line.
Dec. time is the time required for inverter to decrease from the reference frequency to the zero frequency in
a straight line.
• The reference frequency can be set by the F03.00 tens digit. The Acc. / Dec. time can only be selected. See
the illustration in F03.00.
Acc. time, Dec. time switch:
• The Acc. / Dec. time can be selected by 26,27 of DI terminal or F03.09, F03.10 during inverter operation.
Acc. / Dec. mode switching:
• The inverter can select the Acc. / Dec. mode (straight line or S curve) by setting F03.00 or DI terminal
No. 28 function.
Note: The inverter may fail overvoltage when the brake assembly is not properly selected, rapid Dec. or load
inertia is large. F19.18, F19.19 can be adjusted by selecting the appropriate brake assembly or increasing the Dec.
time to avoid possible overvoltage faults.

―56― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F03.09 Switching frequency of Acc. time 2 and time 1 0.00 - upper limit [0.00Hz]
F03.10 Switching frequency of Dec. time 2 and time 1 0.00 - upper limit [0.00Hz]
When the running frequency is smaller than the F03.09 setting, it will accelerate according to Acc. time 2;
Otherwise it will accelerate according to Acc. time 1.
When the running frequency is smaller than the F03.10 setting, it will decelerate according to Dec. time 2;
Otherwise it will decelerate according to Dec. time 1.
• When use terminals to select Acc. / Dec. time (set multi-function terminal as number 26 and 27 function),
F03.10 is disabled.
F03.11 S-curve characteristic time at starting Acc. 0.00 - 2.50 [0.20s]
F03.12 S-curve characteristic time at ending Acc. 0.00 - 2.50 [0.20s]
F03.13 S-curve characteristic time at starting Dec. 0.00 - 2.50 [0.20s]
F03.14 S-curve characteristic time at ending Dec. 0.00 - 2.50 [0.20s]
Refer to the figure of parameter F03.00.
F03.15 Acc. time of jog operation 0.1 - 6000.0 [6.0s]
F03.16 Dec. time of jog operation 0.1 - 6000.0 [6.0s]
F03.15 and F03.16 define the Acc. / Dec. time of jog operation.
F03.17 Dec. time of emergency stop 0.1 - 6000.0 [10.0s]
It defines the Dec. time of emergency stop.

6.2.5 F04: Process PID Control

Closed-loop can be constituted not only by analogue reference and feedback but also by pulse
reference and feedback. Generally, the process PID control mode is used to regulate on-site pressure,
liquid level and temperature etc. 6
The process PID control is shown in the following figure:
Error < N Closed loop Limit Output
Pre-given value +
deviation limit PID adjustment Output
control filter
- characteristic
Feedback value
Y
No process PID
Keep last time result of PID adjustment
adjustment

Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]

F04.00 Process PID control selection 0,1 [0]
0: PID control is disabled.
1: PID control is enabled.
Note: When using the auxiliary PID, set F04.00 to 0.
F04.01 Reference source selection 0 - 7 [0]
0: Digital reference. It is the value of F04.03 reference.
1: AI analogue reference. It is the value of the analogue input voltage AI reference, and refer to Group F16.
2: Terminal pulse reference. It is the value of the terminal pulse input reference, and maximum input pulse
frequency corresponding to 10V of the PID reference.
3 - 6: AI1 - AI4 given.
7: Operation panel potentiometer given.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―57―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F04.02 Feedback source selection 0 - 7 [0]
0: AI analogue feedback. 4: AI3 given.
1: Terminal pulse feedback. 5: AI4 given.
2: AI1 given. 6: Operation panel potentiometer given.
3: AI2 given. 7: Speedn closed loop feedback.
F04.03 Setting digital reference -100.0 - 100.0 [0.0%]
It defines the process PID regulator reference.
• When F04.01 = 0 (digital reference), it is enabled.
F04.04 Proportional gain (P1) 0.0 - 500.0 [50.0]
F04.05 Integral time (I1) 0.01 - 10.00 [1.00s]
F04.06 Integral upper limit 0.0 - 100.0 [100.0%]
F04.07 Differential time (D1) 0.00 - 10.00 [0.00s]
F04.08 Differential amplitude limit value 0.0 - 100.0 [20.0%]
F04.09 Sampling cycle (T) 0.01 - 50.00 [0.10s]
F04.04, F04.05 and F04.07 define the process PID parameters.
F04.06 defines the process PID integral upper limit.
F04.08 defines the process PID differential amplitude limit value.
F04.09 defines the sampling cycle of feedback value and the PID regulator calculates once in each sampling
cycle.
• When F04.07 = 0, the differential is disabled.
F04.10 Bias limit 0.0 - 20.0 (reference) [0.0%]
F04.10 defines the maximum deviation of the output Feedback value F04.10
from the reference closed-loop. Pre-given value
• PID regulator stops operation when the feedback
value is within this range.
Time
• Setting this parameter correctly is instructive to
improve the system output accuracy and stability. Out frequency
• Large setting value of F04.10 may cause the process
PID gap to adjust greatly, the whole process system Time
does not converge the shock.
F04.11 PID regulator upper limit source selection 0 - 7 [0]
0: Set by F04.13.
1: Set by AI analogue value. Set by analogue input voltage AI and refer to Group F16.
2: Set by terminal pulse input.
3 - 6: AI1 - AI4 set.
7: Keypad potentiometer setting.
F04.12 PID regulator lower limit source selection 0 - 7 [0]
It defines the setting source of PID regulator lower limit value.
0: Set by F04.14.
1: Set by AI analogue value. Set by analogue input voltage AI and refer to Group F16.
2: Set by terminal pulse.
3 - 6: AI1 - AI4 set.
7: Keypad potentiometer setting.
F04.13 PID regulator upper limit value 0.00 - upper limit [50.00Hz]
F04.14 PID regulator lower limit value 0.00 - upper limit [0.00Hz]
It defines that the process PID regulator output digital setting value of upper limit or lower limit.

―58― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F04.15 PID regulator characteristic 0,1 [0]
0: Positive. The motor RPM is required to increase with the increase of the reference.
1: Negative. The motor RPM is required to decrease with the increase of the reference.
F04.17 PID output filter time 0.01 - 10.00 [0.05s]
It defines the filtering time of process PID output.
F04.18 PID output reverse selection 0,1 [0]
0: PID regulation disable reverse. When PID output is negative, 0 is the limit.
1: PID regulation enable reverse. When F00.18 = 1 (disable reverse), 0 is the limit.
F04.19 PID output reverse frequency’s upper limit 0.00 - upper limit [50.00Hz]
It defines the PID upper limit frequency when reverse.
• When F04.18 = 1 (PID regulation enable reverse), it is enabled.
F04.20 Proportional gain (P2) 0.0 - 500.0 [50.0]
F04.21 Integral time (I2) 0.01 - 10.00 [1.00s]
F04.22 Derivative time (D2) 0.00 - 10.00 [0.00s]
F04.23 PID parameter adjustment basis 0 - 3 [0]
0: Do not adjust. The second segment PID is invalid.
1: DI.
• PID parameter switching according to DI terminal function No. 59. When the terminal is invalid, select
parameter Group 1 (F04.04, F04.05, F04.07) and select parameter Group 2 (F04.20 - F04.22) when valid.
2: Deviation.
• PID parameter selects parameter Group 1 when the deviation between PID feedback and PID reference
is less than PID parameter switching point 1 (F04.24).
• PID parameter selects parameter Group 2 when the deviation between PID feedback and PID reference
is greater than PID parameter switching point 2 (F04.25). 6
• When the deviation between the PID feedback and the PID reference is between the PID parameter
switching points 1 and 2, the PID parameter is a linear interpolation of the two sets of parameters.
3: Frequency.
• PID parameter selects parameter Group 1 when PID output frequency is less than PID parameter
switching point 1 (F04.24).
• PID parameter selects parameter Group 2 when PID output frequency is greater than PID parameter
switching point 2 (F04.25).
• When the PID output frequency is between PID parameter switching points 1 and 2, the PID parameter
is a linear interpolation of two sets of parameters.
F04.24 PID parameter switching point 1 0.0 - F04.25 [0.0%]
F04.25 PID parameter switching point 2 F04.24 - 100.0 [100.0%]
F04.27 Pulse of each turn 1 - 9999 [1024]
F04.28 Max. closed loop speed 1 - 24000 [1500rpm]
F04.29 PID arithmetic mode 0,1 [0]
0: No operation at stop.
1: Operation at shutdown.
F04.30 PID sleep 0,1 [0]
0: No sleeping.
1: Sleep enable.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―59―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F04.31 Tolerance of waking up 0.0 - 100.0 [0.0%]
F04.32 Delay of waking up 0.0 - 6000.0 [0.0s]
Positive characteristics: sleep state, when the feedback value ≤ set value × (100% - F04.31), and the timing
≥ F04.32, wake up the inverter.
Negative characteristics: In the sleep state, when the feedback value ≥ set value × (100% + F04.31), and the
time ≥ F04.32, wake up the inverter.
F04.33 Sleep tolerance 0.0 - 100.0 [0.0%]
F04.34 Sleep delay 0.0 - 6000.0 [0.0s]
F04.35 Sleep frequency 0.00 - max. frequency
[20.00Hz]
Positive characteristics: wake-up state, when the feedback value ≥ given value × (100% + F04.33), the target
frequency ≤ F04.35 and the timing time ≥ F04.34, the inverter sleep.
Negative characteristics: In the wake-up state, when the feedback value is less than or equal to × (100% -
F04.33), the target frequency is ≤ F04.35 and the counting time is ≥ F04.34. the inverter sleep.

6.2.6 F05: External Reference Curve Parameters

Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F05.00 External reference curve selection 00000 - 33333 [33333]
Units: AI1 characteristic curve selection. Each bit setting:
Tens: AI2 characteristic curve selection. • 0: Line 1.
Hundreds: AI3 characteristic curve selection. • 1: Line 2.
Thousands: AI4 characteristic curve selection. • 2: Polyline.
Ten thousands: Pulse input characteristic curve selection. • 3: No treatment.
Note: Only when using HD30-EIO can hundreds and thousands be enabled.
F05.01 Minimum reference of line 1 0.0 - F05.03 [0.0%]
F05.02 Minimum reference corresponding value of line 1 0.0 - 100.0 [0.0%]
F05.03 Maximum reference of line 1 F05.01 - 100.0 [100.0%]
F05.04 Maximum reference corresponding value of line 1 0.0 - 100.0 [100.0%]
F05.05 Minimum reference of line 2 0.0 - F05.07 [0.0%]
F05.06 Minimum reference corresponding value of line 2 0.0 - 100.0 [0.0%]
F05.07 Maximum reference of line 2 F05.05 - 100.0 [100.0%]
F05.08 Maximum reference corresponding value of line 2 0.0 - 100.0 [100.0%]
F05.09 Maximum reference of polyline F05.11 - 100.0 [100.0%]
F05.10 Maximum reference corresponding value of polyline 0.0 - 100.0 [100.0%]
F05.11 Inflection point 2 reference of polyline F05.13 - F05.09 [100.0%]
F05.12 Inflection point 2 corresponding value 0.0 - 100.0 [100.0%]
F05.13 Inflection point 1 reference of polyline F05.15 - F05.11 [0.0%]
F05.14 Inflection point 1 corresponding value 0.0 - 100.0 [0.0%]
F05.15 Minimum reference of polyline 0.0 - F05.13 [0.0%]
F05.16 Minimum reference corresponding value of polyline 0.0 - 100.0 [0.0%]
F05.01 - F05.04 define the line 1. F05.05 - F05.08 define the line 2. F05.09 - F05.16 define the polyline.
• Line 1, line 2 and polyline can independently achieve positive and negative characteristics as shown in
following figure.
• If set the curve’s minimum reference the same as maximum reference, it must be a line. The default
frequency is the corresponding frequency of the curve minimum reference.

―60― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]

Positive and negative characteristic of line

Setting Setting
corresponding value corresponding value
F05.04 F05.02
F05.08 F05.06

F05.02 F05.04
F05.06 P/A(setting) F05.08 P/A(setting)
F05.01 F05.03 F05.01 F05.03
F05.05 F05.07 F05.05 F05.07
Positive and negative characteristic of polyline
Setting corresponding value Setting corresponding value
F05.10 F05.16
Inflection point 2
F05.12 F05.14 Inflection point 1
F05.14 F05.12 Inflection point 2
Inflection point 1
F05.16 P/A(setting) F05.10 P/A(setting)

F05.15 F05.13 F05.11 F05.09 F05.15 F05.13 F05.11 F05.09

In the figure:
• P/A is terminal pulse / analogue reference.
• P (pulse frequency) is 100% corresponding to F16.17 maximum input pulse frequency.
• A (analogue input value) is 100% corresponding to 10V or 20mA.
F05.17 Skip frequency 1 F00.09 - upper limit [0.00Hz]
F05.18 Skip frequency 2 6
F05.19 Skip frequency 3
F05.20 Range of skip frequency 0.00 - 30.00 [0.00Hz]
The setting of skip frequency is for the inverter’s output frequency to avoid resonance with the load.
• The inverter will skip the above frequencies as Setting frequency after calculated
shown in figure. Up to 3 skip frequency ranges can
be set. F05.19
• During the process of Acc. / Dec., the inverter will
run with countinous frequency output, ignoring F05.18
the skip frequency ranges. But the inverter will not Skip range
run at constant speed in the skip frequency ranges.
F05.17
• Frequency setting is uncontinuous, while Setting frequency
frequency output is continuous.
F05.21 Jog operation frequency digital setting 2 0.00 - upper limit [5.00Hz]
When select jog operation 2 through terminal, set the jog frequency operation according to F05.21.
F05.22 Operation panel potentiometer curve selection 0 - 3 [3]
0: Straight line 1.
1: Straight line 2.
2: Polyline.
3: No treatment.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―61―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
6.2.7 F06: MS SPEED and Simple PLC
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F06.00 Multi-step frequency command 1 F00.09 - upper limit [3.00Hz]
F06.01 Multi-step frequency command 2 F00.09 - upper limit [6.00Hz]
F06.02 Multi-step frequency command 3 F00.09 - upper limit [9.00Hz]
F06.03 Multi-step frequency command 4 F00.09 - upper limit [12.00Hz]
F06.04 Multi-step frequency command 5 F00.09 - upper limit [15.00Hz]
F06.05 Multi-step frequency command 6 F00.09 - upper limit [18.00Hz]
F06.06 Multi-step frequency command 7 F00.09 - upper limit [21.00Hz]
F06.07 Multi-step frequency command 8 F00.09 - upper limit [24.00Hz]
F06.08 Multi-step frequency command 9 F00.09 - upper limit [27.00Hz]
F06.09 Multi-step frequency command 10 F00.09 - upper limit [30.00Hz]
F06.10 Multi-step frequency command 11 F00.09 - upper limit [33.00Hz]
F06.11 Multi-step frequency command 12 F00.09 - upper limit [36.00Hz]
F06.12 Multi-step frequency command 13 F00.09 - upper limit [39.00Hz]
F06.13 Multi-step frequency command 14 F00.09 - upper limit [42.00Hz]
F06.14 Multi-step frequency command 15 F00.09 - upper limit [45.00Hz]
They define the initial value of each step speed in multi-step speed mode and PLC operation mode.
F06.15 Simple PLC control selection 0,1 [0]
0: No PLC operation.
1: Enabling PLC operation. It need reset the value of F06.16 - F06.46 according to actual operation.
F06.16 Simple PLC operation mode selection 0000 - 1122 [0000]
There are 4 parameter settings: units (0 - 2), tens (0 - 2), hundreds (0,1), thousands (0,1).
Units: PLC operation mode selection (taking 15-step PLC for example)
• 0: Stop after single cycle operation. The inverter stops automatically after one operating cycle. It will start
only after receiving the run command next time.
f3 f13
f2 f12
f1 f4 f11 f14
f5 f15
f10 Stop
f6 f9
f8
f7
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15
Running
command
• 1: Maintain the final value after single cycle of PLC operation. The inverter will maintain the run frequency
and direction of the last step after completing one operating cycle.
f3 f13
f2 f12
f1 f4 f11 f14
f5 f15 Keep
f10
f6 f9
f8
f7
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15
Running
command
123

―62― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
• 2: Cycle operation. The inverter will operate with a new cycle from Step 1 automatically after completing
one operating cycle until receiving the stop command.
f3 f13 Start next circulatio
f2 f12 automatically
f4 f11 f14
f1
f5 f15 f1
f10
f6 f9
Stop
f8
f7
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T1
Running
command
Stop
command

Tens: PLC operation restart mode selection after pause

• 0: Start from step 1.
Interrupt signal
• If the inverter stops during PLC operation
due to the stop command, fault or power Output f3
failure, the PLC operation will start from frequency
f2
the Step 1 next time. f4
• 1: Continue to operate from the step where f5
Time
the inverter pauses. 0
• If the inverter stops during PLC operation T3 T41 T42 T5
due to the stop command or fault, it will Output f3
frequency T41 = Running time
record the uptime. f2
T42 = Remained time
Interrupt
• When it restarts, the inverter will continue frequency f4
6
operation from the step where it pauses as
f5 Time
shown in figure. 0
• 2: Continue to operate at the frequency T3 T41 T42 T5
when the inverter pauses.
• When the inverter stops during PLC operation due to the stop command or fault, it will record not only
the operated time but also the current frequency.
• It will continue to operate at the recorded frequency upon restart, as shown in figure.
Note: The difference between Mode 1 and Mode 2 is that Mode 2 also memorizes the running frequency when the
inverter pauses, and the inverter will continue to operate at the frequency upon restart.
Hundreds: Save the PLC status after power failure
• 0: Not save. The PLC running status will not be saved after power failure and start running from Step 1
next time.
• 1: Save. The operating parameters of PLC operation, including the operating step, operating frequency
and operating time of this step,etc, can be saved. The inverter will continue to operate in accordance with
the PLC operation restart mode selection after pause (defined by tens of F06.16).
Thousands: Time unit selection of the PLC step
• 0: Second (s).
• 1: Minute (m).
F06.17 Setting of PLC step 1 000 - 321 [000]
F06.19 Setting of PLC step 2 000 - 321 [000]
F06.21 Setting of PLC step 3 000 - 321 [000]
F06.23 Setting of PLC step 4 000 - 321 [000]
F06.25 Setting of PLC step 5 000 - 321 [000]

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―63―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F06.27 Setting of PLC step 6 000 - 321 [000]
F06.29 Setting of PLC step 7 000 - 321 [000]
F06.31 Setting of PLC step 8 000 - 321 [000]
F06.33 Setting of PLC step 9 000 - 321 [000]
F06.35 Setting of PLC step 10 000 - 321 [000]
F06.37 Setting of PLC step 11 000 - 321 [000]
F06.39 Setting of PLC step 12 000 - 321 [000]
F06.41 Setting of PLC step 13 000 - 321 [000]
F06.43 Setting of PLC step 14 000 - 321 [000]
F06.45 Setting of PLC step 15 000 - 321 [000]
F06.17, F06.19, F06.21, F06.23, F06.25, F06.27, F06.29, F06.31, F06.33, F06.35, F06.37, F06.39, F06.41, F06.43,
F06.45 are used to configure the running frequency, the direction, Acc. and Dec. time of every PLC step.
Units: PLC running frequency selection
• 0: Multi- step frequency command. The absolute value of each step frequency is the same as the setting
of multi-step frequency.
• Example: the absolute value of running frequency in PLC Step 15 is the setting value of F06.14.
• 1: Depend on F00.10. The running frequency source selectes the reference by F00.10 selection.
Tens: Operation direction selection of PLC at different steps
• 0: Forward.
• 1: Reverse.
• 2: Depend on run command. The motor’s operation direction can be alternated via external direction
command.
• If the direction is not set, the inverter will run in the direction according to last step.
Hundreds: Acc. / Dec. time selection of PLC at different steps
• 0: Acc. / Dec. time 1.
• 1: Acc. / Dec. time 2.
• 2: Acc. / Dec. time 3.
• 3: Acc. / Dec. time 4.
F06.18 Running time of step 1 0.0 - 3276.7 [5.0]
F06.20 Running time of step 2 0.0 - 3276.7 [0.0]
F06.22 Running time of step 3 0.0 - 3276.7 [0.0]
F06.24 Running time of step 4 0.0 - 3276.7 [0.0]
F06.26 Running time of step 5 0.0 - 3276.7 [0.0]
F06.28 Running time of step 6 0.0 - 3276.7 [0.0]
F06.30 Running time of step 7 0.0 - 3276.7 [0.0]
F06.32 Running time of step 8 0.0 - 3276.7 [0.0]
F06.34 Running time of step 9 0.0 - 3276.7 [0.0]
F06.36 Running time of step 10 0.0 - 3276.7 [0.0]
F06.38 Running time of step 11 0.0 - 3276.7 [0.0]
F06.40 Running time of step 12 0.0 - 3276.7 [0.0]
F06.42 Running time of step 13 0.0 - 3276.7 [0.0]
F06.44 Running time of step 14 0.0 - 3276.7 [0.0]
F06.46 Running time of step 15 0.0 - 3276.7 [0.0]
F06.18, F06.20, F06.22, F06.24, F06.26, F06.28, F06.30, F06.32, F06.34, F06.36, F06.38, F06.40, F06.42, F06.44,
F06.46 define the running time of PLC at different steps.
• When set the running time to 0 at some step, it means that the PLC function of this step is disabled.

―64― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
6.2.8 F07: Wobble Operation Parameters
The wobble operation process is shown as below:
First, the inverter accelerates to the preset frequency of wobble operation (F07.02) within the Acc. time
and then waits for certain time (F07.03). Hinterher the inverter transits to the central frequency of the
wobble operation as per the Acc. time, and ultimately start wobble operation according to the preset
wobble amplitude (F07.04), jump frequency (F07.05), wobble cycle (F07.06) and the rise time of
wobble operation (F07.07) until it receives a stop command and stops as per the Dec. time.
The process is shown in figure:
Running frequency
Swing frequency value Fw = Fset x F07.04
Wobble up limit frequency FH FH = Fset + Fw

Wobble centre frequency Fset

Wobble down limit frequency FL FL = Fset - Fw

F07.02
Jump frequency = Fw x F07.05

Time

Acc. time F07.03 Dec.time

F07.06
Up time: F07.06 x F07.07
Running command

Stop command
6
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F07.00 Wobble operation selection 0,1 [0]
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
F07.01 Wobble operation mode 0000 - 1111 [0000]
Units: Start mode of wobble operation.
• 0: Auto start. The inverter will first operate at the preset frequency of wobble operation (F07.02) for
certain time (F07.03), and then enter wobble mode automatically.
• 1: Manual start. If the multi-function terminal is set as No.36 function (set as wobble start function) and
the signal is enabled, the inverter will enter wobble mode. If the terminal is disabled, the inverter will end
wobble operation and operate at the preset frequency of wobble operation (F07.02).
Tens: Wobble operation amplitude. Refer to parameter F07.04.
• 0: Relative to the wobble central frequency.
• 1: Relative to the maximum output frequency.
Hundreds: Restart mode of wobble operation.
• 0: The inverter restarts the wobble operation as per the recorded frequency and direction when it stops
last time.
• 1: The inverter restarts the wobble operation from 0Hz.
Thousands: Save the wobble operation parameters at power outage
• 0: Saved. When the hundreds of F07.01 is set as 0, the wobble operation parameters will be saved when
power outage occurs.
• 1: Not be saved.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―65―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F07.02 Preset wobble frequency 0.00 - upper limit [0.00Hz]
F07.03 Holding time of preset wobble frequency 0.0 - 999.9 [0.0s]
F07.02 defines the inverter’s running frequency before entering wobble mode.
F07.03 defines the time that the inverter operates at the preset wobble frequency.
• Only when select auto start (set units of F07.01 as 0) will F07.03 be enabled.
F07.04 Wobble amplitude 0.0 - 50.0 [0.0%]
Relative to central frequency: FW = central frequency × F07.04.
• Wobble central frequency is the frequency value set by F00.10 (frequency reference source).
Relative to maximum output frequency: FW = maximum output frequency F00.06 × F07.04.
F07.05 Jump frequency 0.0 - F07.04 [0.0%]
The setting is the percentage of wobble amplitude. There is not jump frquency if set as 0.
F07.06 Wobble operation cycle 0.1 - 999.9 [10.0s]
F07.06 defines a complete cycle of wobble operation including rising and falling processes.
F07.07 Rising time of triangle wave 0.0 - 100.0 [50.0%]
Relative to wobble operation cycle of the F07.06, F07.07 defines the rising and the falling time of wobble
operation and their unit is s.
• Rising time of wobble operation = F07.06 × F07.07.
• Falling time of wobble operation = F07.06 × (1 - F07.07).

6.2.9 F08: Asyn. Motor 1 Parameters

R1 LI R2 LI

I1 I2
1-S
U1 S R2
Io

Lm

R1=F08.07 (Stator resistance) LI=F08.09 (Leakage inductance)

R2=F08.08 (Rotor resistance) Lm=F08.10 (Mutual inductance)
Io=F08.11 (Excitation current) S=Slip ratio

Mutual inductance is calculated by the following formula:

F08.01
Mutual inductance F08.10 F08.09
2√3π F08.03 F08.11
Note: Except F08.03, F08.04 and F08.06, the other factory settings are depended on the inverter’s model.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F08.00 Rated power of motor 1 0.2 - 500.0kW [Depend on HD30]
F08.01 Rated voltage of motor 1 0 - 999V [Depend on HD30]
F08.02 Rated current of motor 1 5.5kW above motor 0.1 - 999.9A [Depend on HD30]
5.5kW and below motor 0.01 - 99.99A [Depend on HD30]
F08.03 Rated frequency of motor 1 1.0 - 400.0 [50.0Hz]
F08.04 Rated RPM of motor 1 1 - 24000 [1500rpm]
F08.03 and F08.04 should be set in accordance with the parameters of motor nameplate.

―66― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F08.05 Power factor of motor 1 0.001 - 1.000 [Depend on HD30]
F08.06 Parameter auto-tuning of motor 1 0 - 3 [0]
Note: The auto-tuning is enabled only in keypad control mode (F00.11 = 0).
0: Auto-tuning is disabled.
1: Stationary auto-tuning.
• In the process of stationary auto-tuning, the motor is at rest. The stator resistance, rotor resistance and
leakage inductance will be measured and written into F08.07, F08.08 and F08.09 automatically.
2: Rotary auto-tuning.
• In process of rotary auto-tuning, the motor is at rest at the beginning, and the stator resistance, rotor
resistance and leakage inductance will be measured. Hinterher the motor will start rotating,
accordingly mutual inductance and idling exciting inductance will be measured automatically. All the
measured values above will be saved respectively in F08.07, F08.08, F08.09, F08.10 and F08.11.
• When the motor is in rotating status, oscillation, even overcurrent, might occur. In this case, please
press the key to stop auto-tuning and then adjust the F09.15 (oscollation-suppression mode)
and F09.16 (oscollation-suppression factor) suitably to mitigate the possible oscillation.
3. Motor stator resistance measurement.
• The motor is at rest, and the stator resistance of the motor is automatically measured and the measured
parameters are automatically written to F08.07.
Auto-tuning procedures:
1. Input correctly the motor parameters as per its nameplate (F08.00 - F08.04).
2. When F08.06 is set as 2, please set the proper Acc. time 1 (F03.01) and Dec. time 1 (F03.02) and make sure
the motor is disconnected with the load for security.
3. Set F08.06 as 1 or 2 firstly, then press the key, and therewith press key to start auto-tuning.
The LED will display “tunE”.
4. When the RUN indicator is flashing, it indicates that auto-tuning has been completed. At this time, the
inverter displays the parameters of stop status and F08.06 resets to 0.
6
F08.07 Stator resistance of motor 1 5.5kW below motor 0.00 - 99.99Ω [Depend on HD30]
7.5 - 75kW motor 0.000 - 9.999Ω [Depend on HD30]
90kW and above motor 0.0000 - 0.9999Ω [Depend on HD30]
F08.08 Rotor resistance of motor 1 5.5kW below motor 0.00 - 99.99Ω [Depend on HD30]
7.5 - 75kW motor 0.000 - 9.999Ω [Depend on HD30]
90kW and above motor 0.0000 - 0.9999Ω [Depend on HD30]
F08.09 Leakage inductance of motor 1 5.5kW below motor 0.0 - 5000.0mH [Depend on HD30]
7.5 - 75kW motor 0.00 - 500.00mH [Depend on HD30]
90kW and above motor 0.000 - 50.000 mH [Depend on HD30]
F08.10 Mutual inductance of motor 1 5.5kW below motor 0.0 - 5000.0mH [Depend on HD30]
7.5 - 75kW motor 0.00 - 500.00mH [Depend on HD30]
90kW and above motor 0.000 - 50.000 mH [Depend on HD30]
F08.11 Idling exciting current of motor 1 5.5kW and below motor 0.0 - 999.9A [Depend on HD30]
5.5kW above motor 0.00 - 99.99A [Depend on HD30]
F08.12 Motor 1 core saturation coefficient 1 0.00 - 1.00 [1.00]
F08.13 Motor 1 core saturation coefficient 2 0.00 - 1.00 [1.00]
F08.14 Motor 1 core saturation coefficient 3 0.00 - 1.00 [1.00]
F08.15 Motor 1 core saturation coefficient 4 0.00 - 1.00 [1.00]
F08.16 Motor 1 core saturation coefficient 5 0.00 - 1.00 [1.00]

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―67―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
6.2.10 F09: V/f Control Parameters
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F09.00 V/f curve selection of motor 1 0 - 4 [0]
It defines flexible V/f setting modes so as to meet requirements of different load characteristics.
• Four preset curves and one user-defined curve can be Voltage
F08.01
selected according to the setting of F09.00.
0
0: Line. Shown as curve 0 in figure. 2
1: Square curve. Shown as curve 1 in the figure. 3
1/3×F08.01 1
2: 1.2 exponential curve. Shown as curve 2 in the figure.
3: 1.7 exponential curve. Shown as curve 3 in the figure. Frequency
0
4: User-defined curve.
1/3×F08.03 F08.03
F09.01 V/f frequency value F3 of motor 1 F09.03 - 100.0 [0.0%]
F09.02 V/f voltage value V3 of motor 1 F09.04 - 100.0 [0.0%]
F09.03 V/f frequency value F2 of motor 1 F09.05 - F09.01 [0.0%]
F09.04 V/f voltage value V2 of motor 1 F09.06 - F09.02 [0.0%]
F09.05 V/f frequency value F1 of motor 1 0.0 - F09.03 [0.0%]
F09.06 V/f voltage value V1 of motor 1 0.0 - F09.04 [0.0%]
F09.01 - F09.06 is the user-definable V/f curve. Voltage
F08.01
• If F09.00 = 4 (user-definable curve), F09.06 is
F09.02×F08.01 V3,F3
enabled. V2,F2
• The V/f curve can be defined by connecting 3 F09.04×F08.01
points of (V1, F1), (V2, F2) and (V3, F3), to
F09.06×F08.01 V1,F1
adapt to special load.
• According to the actual operation, set proper Frequency
0
curve to meet the requirements of load F09.05× F09.03× F09.01× F08.03
characteristics. F08.03 F08.03 F08.03
F09.07 Torque boost of motor 1 0.0 - 30.0
[45kW and below inverter: 2.0%]
[55 - 132kW inverter: 1.0%]
[160kW and above inverter: 0.5%]
F09.08 Cut-off point used for manual torque boost of motor 1 0.0 - 50.0 (F08.03) [25.0%]
In order to compensate the torque drop at low frequency, the inverter can boost the voltage so as to boost
the torque.
• Torque boost is valid at any value of F09.00 for V/f curve.
• When F09.07 ≠ 0, it indicates the manual torque boost mode.
• When F09.07 = 0, it indicates the automatic torque boost mode.
• Set the rated motor speed (F08.03) according Voltage
to the motor nameplate parameter.
F08.01
• Obtain rated rpm (F08.04) by rotation
Boosted
auto-tuning; and obtain the exact motor value
stator resistance (F08.07) by auto-tuning);
• Set the slip compensation gain F09.09 = Voltage of manual
100.0%, to enable slip compensation to obtain torque boost
a good load capacity. Frequency
• F09.08 is relative to percentage of motor’s rated 0
frequency (F08.03). F09.08max F08.03

F09.09 Slip compensation gain of motor 1 0.0 - 300.0 [0.0%]

F09.10 Slip compensation filter time of motor 1 0.01 - 10.00 [0.10s]

―68― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F09.11 Slip compensation limitation of motor 1 0.0 - 250.0 [200.0%]
The motor slip changes with the load torque, which results in the variance of motor speed. Reduce the
influence through slip compensation.
• Electric and generating state can increase slip compensation gain (F09.09).
• Slip compensation limit is fixed value within constant torque. It increases in proportion to output
frequency within constant power.
• Auto slip compensation depends on rated slip of motor. User should properly set rated frequency
(F08.03) and rated Rpm (F08.04).
Range of slip compensation = actual slip compensation limit × rated slip.
Slip compensation limit Slip
F00.06
×F09.11 Positive slip
F08.03
compensation

F09.11 -100% Load

Actual slip
compensation limit 100%
Output frequency
F08.03 F00.06 Negative slip
compensation
F09.12 Motor 1 iron loss 0.000 - 9.999kW [Depend on HD30]
V/f is used when the torque compensation is controlled. it is determined in defaut according to the rated
power of the motor. Normally, no change is required. F09.12 is set to this value if the accurate iron loss value
can be obtained from the motor test report.
F09.14 AVR (automatic voltage regulation) function of motor 1 0 - 2 [1]
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled all the time.
2: Disabled in Dec. process. 6
• The output voltage can be regulated to maintain constant via AVR. Thus, normally the AVR function
should be enabled, especially when the input voltage is higher than the rated voltage.
• In Dec. process, if the F09.14 = 0 or F09.14 = 2, the running current will be a little higher; while if the
F09.14 = 1, the motor will decelerate steadily and the current will be smaller.
F09.15 Motor 1 low frequency suppression shock coefficient 0 - 200 [50]
F09.16 Motor 1 high frequency suppression shock coefficient 0 - 200 [20]
It is used to suppress the natural oscillation generated when the inverter is engaged with the motor.
• If the output current changes repeatedly during constant load operation, the oscillation can be
eliminated by adjusting the corresponding coefficient to allow the motor to run smoothly.
F09.17 Motor 1 energy saving control select 0 - 3 [0]
0: Energy saving control invalid.
3: Energy saving according to output current. When F09.17 = 3 and V/f control mode (F00.01 = 0).
• When the output frequency ≥ F09.19 and the output current ≤ F09.20 × inverter rated current, enter
the energy saving mode.
• If any of the above conditions are not currently met, the drive will exit the power saving mode.
Note: The power saving mode is only valid at constant speed.
F09.18 Motor 1 energy saving factor 0.0 - 100.0 [5.0%]
F09.19 Motor 1 energy start frequency 0.00 - 50.00 [25.00Hz]
F09.20 Motor 1 energy switching point 0.0 - 100.0 [100.0%]
F09.21 Motor 1 energy saving detecting times 0 - 5000 [10 times]
F09.22 Motor 1 energy voltage recovery time 40 - 4000 [100ms]
F09.23 Motor 1 energy voltage decreasing time 40 - 4000 [100ms]

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―69―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
6.2.11 F10: Motor 1 Vector Control Speed-loop Parameters
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F10.00 Speed control proportional gain 1 of motor 1 0.1 - 200.0 [10.0]
F10.01 Speed control integral time 1 of motor 1 0.00 - 10.00 [0.10s]
F10.02 Speed control proportional gain 2 of motor 1 0.1 - 200.0 [10.0]
F10.03 Speed control integral time 2 of motor 1 0.00 - 10.00 [0.20s]
F10.04 Speed-loop PI switching frequency 1 of motor 1 0.00 - F10.05 [10.00Hz]
F10.05 Speed-loop PI switching frequency 2 of motor 1 F10.04 - 50.00 [15.00Hz]
F10.00 - F10.05 and F10.07 comfirm the PID parameters of automatic speed regulator (ASR). The structure of
ASR is shown in figure.
Frequency command+ Error Torque current setting
PID
-
Frequency feedback
Torque limit
As the right figure:
PI parameter
• When inverter operates within 0 - F10.04, the PI parameters of F10.00 /
F10.01
vector control are F10.00 and F10.01;
• When inverter operates above F10.05, the PI parameters of
vector control are F10.02 and F10.03; F10.02 /
• When inverter operates within F10.04 - F10.05, P is the linear F10.03 Frequency
interpolation between F10.00 and F10.02, while I is the linear
0 F10.04 F10.05
interpolation between F10.01 and F10.03.
• The system’s response can be expedited through increasing the ASR proportional gain P, but oscillation
may occur if the value of P is too high.
• The system’s response can be expedited through increasing the ASR integral constant Ti, but oscillation
and high overshoot happen easily if the value of Ti is too high.
• If Ti = 0, the integral function is disabled and the speed-loop works only as a proportional controller.
• Generally, the proportional gain P should be adjusted firstly to the maximum on condition that the
system does not vibrate, and then the integral constant Ti should be adjusted to shorten the response
time without overshoot.
• It need increase proportional gain (P) and decrease integral constant (Ti), on condition that shorter
dynamic response time is required during low frequency operation.
F10.06 Speed-loop integral limitation of motor 1 0.0 - 200.0 (F08.02) [180.0%]
It is used to limit the maximum value of the vector control speed-loop integral.
F10.07 Speed-loop differential time of motor 1 0.00 - 1.00 [0.00s]
It defines the vector control speed-loop differential time.
• Generally, it doesn’t need to set F10.07 except for expediting the dynamic response.
• There is not the speed-loop differential when F10.07 = 0.
F10.08 Speed-loop output filter time of motor 1 0.000 - 1.000 [0.020s]
It is used to filter the output of ASR regulator.
• When F10.08 = 0, the speed-loop filter is disabled.
F10.09 Motor 1 torque limit lock selection 0,1 [0]
0: Do not lock.
1: All of the torque limit is same with FWD electric torque limit.

―70― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F10.10 Motor 1 Torque limit channel 0000 - 7777 [0000]
Define the setting channel of torque value.
Unit: Forward rotation electric torque limit channel
Ten: Reverse electric torque limit channel
Hundreds: Forward rotation torque limit channel
Thousands: Reverse rotation torque limit channel
• 0: Number limit.
• 1: Analog input limit.
• 2: Terminal pulse limit.
• 3 - 6: AI1 - AI4 limit.
• 7: Keypad potentiometer is limited.
F10.11 Motor torque limitation when motor 1 is forward 0.0 - 200.0 (F08.02) [180.0%]
F10.12 Motor torque limitation when motor 1 is reverse
F10.13 Recreated torque limitation when motor 1 is forward
F10.14 Recreated torque limitation when motor 1 is reverse

6.2.12 F11: Motor 1 Vector Control Current Loop Parameter

Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F11.00 Motor 1 current loop KP 1 - 2000 [400]
F11.01 Motor 1 current loop KI 1 - 1000 [200]
Defines the PI parameters for a given current loop regulator (ACR).
• Normally, it is recommended not to adjust the current loop parameters.
F11.02 Motor 1 current loop output filter times 0 - 31 [3]
The output of the current loop regulator is filtered.
6
F11.03 Motor 1 current loop feedforward enabled 0,1 [0]
The output voltage feedforward of current loop feedforward is calculated in real time based on the motor
parameters and the detected field current and torque current.
• When the motor parameters are accurate, the current loop feedforward can boost the dynamic response
of the entire system.
• When the motor parameters are not accurate, please disable the current loop feedforward.
0: Feedforward is prohibited.
1: Enable feedforward.
F11.04 Motor 1 excitation boost setting 0.0 - 30.0 [0.0%]
Setting range 0.0 - 30.0% motor no - load excitation current.
Motor load frequency within the rated frequency range, improve the motor carrying capacity by increasing
the motor excitation current.
F11.05 Motor 1 field orientation optimization setting 00 - 11 [00]
Unit: Field orientation angle correction enable
• 0: Field orientation correction is forbidden.
• 1: Enables magnetic field orientation correction.
Ten: Mutual inductance projections enabled
• 0: Disable mutual inductance based on flux calculation.
• 1: Enable mutual inductance based on flux calculation.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―71―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
6.2.13 F13: Asyn. Motor 2 Parameters
This Group can be set as the second Group of motor parameters and control parameters
corresponding to the first Group parameters (motor 1). The concrete meaning refers the corresponding
parameters of motor 1 and achieves flexible switching between the 2 motors (refer to DI terminal No.
47 function).
Note:
Check F08: Asyn. Motor 1 Parameters for F13.01 - F13.15, F13.53, F13.54.
Check F09: V/f Control Parameters for F13.16 - F13.34, F13.58 - F13.62.
Check F10: Motor 1 Vector Control Speed-loop Parameters for F13.35 - F13.49.
Check F11: Motor 1 Vector Control Current Loop Parameter for F13.50 - F13.52, F13.55 - F13.57.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F13.00 Control mode selection of motor 2 0 - 2 [0]
0: V/f control without PG.
2: Vector control without PG.
F13.01 Rated power of motor 2 0.2 - 500.0kW [Depend on HD30]
F13.02 Rated voltage of motor 2 0 - 999V [Depend on HD30]
F13.03 Rated current of motor 2 5.5kW above motor 0.1 - 999.9A [Depend on HD30]
5.5kW and below motor 0.01 - 99.99A [Depend on HD30]
F13.04 Rated frequency of motor 2 1.0 - 400.0[50.0Hz]
F13.05 Rated RPM of motor 2 1 - 24000 [Depend on HD30]
F13.07 Parameter auto-tuning of motor 2 0 - 3 [0]
0: No action. 2: Rotary auto-tuning.
1: Stationary auto-tuning. 3: Motor stator resistance measurement.
F13.08 Stator resistance of motor 2 5.5kW below motor 0.00 - 99.99Ω [Depend on HD30]
7.5 - 75kW motor 0.000 - 9.999Ω [Depend on HD30]
90kW and above motor 0.0000-0.9999Ω [Depend on HD30]
F13.09 Rotor resistance of motor 2 5.5kW below motor 0.00 - 99.99Ω [Depend on HD30]
7.5 - 75kW motor 0.000 - 9.999Ω [Depend on HD30]
90kW and above motor 0.0000-0.9999Ω [Depend on HD30]
F13.10 Leakage inductance of motor 2 5.5kW below motor 0.0 - 5000.0mH [Depend on HD30]
7.5 - 75kW motor 0.00 - 500.00mH [Depend on HD30]
0.000 - 50.000 mH [Depend on
90kW and above motor
HD30]
F13.11 Mutual inductance of motor 2 5.5kW below motor 0.0 - 5000.0mH [Depend on HD30]
7.5 - 75kW motor 0.00 - 500.00mH [Depend on HD30]
0.000 - 50.000 mH [Depend on
90kW and above motor
HD30]
F13.12 Idling exciting current of motor 2 5.5kW and below motor 0.0 - 999.9A [Depend on HD30]
5.5kW above motor 0.00 - 99.99A [Depend on HD30]
F13.13 Motor 2 core saturation coefficient 1 0.00 - 1.00 [1.00]
F13.14 Motor 2 core saturation coefficient 2 0.00 - 1.00 [1.00]
F13.15 Motor 2 core saturation coefficient 3 0.00 - 1.00 [1.00]

―72― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F13.16 V/f curve selection of motor 2 0 - 4 [0]
0: Line.
1: Square curve.
2: 1.2 exponential curve.
3: 1.7 exponential curve.
4: User-defined curve.
F13.17 V/f frequency value F3 of motor 2 F13.19 - 100.0 [0.0%]
F13.18 V/f voltage value V3 of motor 2 F13.20 - 100.0 [0.0%]
F13.19 V/f frequency value F2 of motor 2 F13.21 - F13.17 [0.0%]
F13.20 V/f voltage value V2 of motor 2 F13.22 - F13.18 [0.0%]
F13.21 V/f frequency value F1 of motor 2 0.0 - F13.19 [0.0%]
F13.22 V/f voltage value V1 of motor 2 0.0 - F13.20 [0.0%]
F13.23 Torque boost of motor 2 0.0 - 30.0
[45kW and below inverter: 2.0%]
[55 - 132kW inverter: 1.0%]
[160kW and above inverter: 0.5%]
F13.24 Cut-off point used for manual torque boost of motor 2 0.0 - 50.0 (F13.04) [25%]
F13.25 Slip compensation gain of motor 2 0.0 - 300.0 [0.0%]
F13.26 Slip compensation filter time of motor 2 0.01 - 10.00 [0.10s]
F13.27 Slip compensation limitation of motor 2 0.0 - 250.0 [200.0%]
F13.28 Compensation constant of motor 2 0.000 - 9.999kW [Depend on HD30]
F13.30 AVR (automatic voltage regulation) function of motor 2 0 - 2 [1]
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled all the time. 6
2: Disabled in Dec. process.
F13.31 Motor 2 low frequency suppression shock coefficient 0 - 200 [50]
F13.32 Motor 2 high frequency suppression shock coefficient 0 - 200 [20]
F13.33 Motor 2 energy saving control select 0 - 3 [0]
0: Energy saving control invalid.
3: Energy saving according to output current.
F13.34 Motor 2 energy saving factor 0.0 - 100.0 [5.0%]
F13.35 Speed control proportional gain 1 of motor 2 0.1 - 200.0 [10.0]
F13.36 Speed control integral time 1 of motor 2 0.00 - 10.00 [0.20s]
F13.37 Speed control proportional gain 2 of motor 2 0.1 - 200.0 [10.0]
F13.38 Speed control integral time 2 of motor 2 0.00 - 10.00 [0.20s]
F13.39 Speed-loop PI switching frequency 1 of motor 2 0.00 - F13.40 [10.00Hz]
F13.40 Speed-loop PI switching frequency 2 of motor 2 F13.39 - 50.00 [15.00Hz]
F13.41 Speed-loop integral limitation of motor 2 0.0 - 200.0 (F13.03) [180.0%]
F13.42 Speed-loop differential time of motor 2 0.00 - 1.00 [0.00s]
F13.43 Speed-loop output filter time of motor 2 0.000 - 1.000 [0.000s]
F13.44 Motor 2 torque limit lock selection 0,1 [0]
0: Do not lock.
1: All of the torque limit is same with FWD electric torque limit.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―73―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F13.45 Motor 2 Torque limit channel 0000 - 7777 [0000]
Unit: Forward rotation electric torque limit channel
Ten: Reverse electric torque limit channel
Hundreds: Forward rotation torque limit channel
Thousands: Reverse rotation torque limit channel
• 0: Number limit.
• 1: Analog input limit.
• 2: Terminal pulse limit.
• 3 - 6: AI1 - AI4 limit.
• 7: Keypad potentiometer is limited.
F13.46 Motor torque limitation when motor 2 is forward 0.0 - 200.0 (F13.03) [180.0%]
F13.47 Motor torque limitation when motor 2 is reverse
F13.48 Recreated torque limitation when motor 2 is forward
F13.49 Recreated torque limitation when motor 2 is reverse
F13.50 Motor 2 current loop KP 1 - 2000 [400]
F13.51 Motor 2 current loop KI 1 - 1000 [200]
F13.52 Motor 2 current loop output filter times 0 - 31 [3]
F13.53 Motor 2 core saturation coefficient 4 0.00 - 1.00 [1.00]
F13.54 Motor 2 core saturation coefficient 5 0.00 - 1.00 [1.00]
F13.55 Motor 2 current loop feedforward enabled 0,1 [1]
0: Feedforward is prohibited.
1: Enable feedforward.
F13.56 Motor 2 excitation boost setting 0.0 - 30.0 [0.0%]
F13.57 Motor 2 field orientation optimization setting 00 - 11 [00]
Unit: Field orientation angle correction enable
• 0: Field orientation correction is forbidden.
• 1: Enables magnetic field orientation correction.
Ten: Mutual inductance projections enabled
• 0: Disable mutual inductance based on flux calculation.
• 1: Enable mutual inductance based on flux calculation.
F13.58 Motor 2 energy start frequency 0.00 - 50.00 [25.00Hz]
F13.59 Motor 2 energy switching point 0.0 - 100.0 [100.0%]
F13.60 Motor 2 energy saving detecting times 0 - 5000 [10 times]
F13.61 Motor 2 energy voltage recovery time 40 - 4000 [100ms]
F13.62 Motor 2 energy voltage decreasing time 40 - 4000 [100ms]

―74― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
6.2.14 F15: Digital I/O Terminal Parameters
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F15.00 DI1 function 0 - 87 [2]
F15.01 DI2 function 0 - 87 [3]
F15.02 DI3 function 0 - 87 [0]
F15.03 DI4 function 0 - 87 [0]
F15.04 DI5 function 0 - 87 [0]
F15.05 DI6 function 0 - 87 [0]
F15.06 DI7 function 0 - 87 [0]
F15.07 DI8 function 0 - 87 [0]
F15.08 DI9 function 0 - 87 [0]
Note: Only when using HD30-EIO will F15.06 - F15.08 be enabled.
0: Unused. It disables the terminal’s function. The inverter ignores the signal input via this terminal.
• The unwanted terminal is recommended to be set as 0 so as to avoid wrong connection or action.
1: Inverter enabled.
• When enabled, the inverter is enabled to run;
• When disabled, the inverter is disabled to run and will be in auto stop status.
• If no terminal selects this function, it defaults that the inverter is enabled.
2,3: FWD/REV function. You can set any multi-function terminal for the FWD/REV terminal to control the
inverter’s run and stop.
• The forward / reverse function is only active in the terminal control mode.
• Refer to parameter F15.16.
4: Three-wire operation mode.
• Refer to parameter F15.16.
5 - 7,87: Frequency source selection 1 - 4. 6
• Up to 2n frequency reference sources can be switched through terminal logic combination setting n
(the maximum n is 4). Refer to the below table.
Source 4 Source 3 Source 2 Source 1
Setting channel
(No 87) (No 7) (No 6) (No 5)
0 0 0 0 Holding
0 0 0 1 Display panel digital setting
0 0 1 0 Terminal digital setting
0 0 1 1 SCI communication digital setting
0 1 0 0 Analogue value setting
0 1 0 1 Terminal pulse setting
0 1 1 X Hold
1 0 0 0 Panel digital setting
1 0 0 1 Terminal digital setting
1 0 1 0 Communicaiton digital setting
1 0 1 1 AI1setting
1 1 0 0 AI2 setting
1 1 0 1 AI3 setting
1 1 1 0 AI4 setting
1 1 1 1 Keypad potentiometer setting
123

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―75―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
8: The frequency source switch to analogue setting.
• If the setting is 8, the frequency reference source can be forcibly switched to analogue setting.
• The priority of frequency sources is shown below:
Keypad key Local remote switching function (F00.12 = 1) > frequency switch to analog (DI terminal
is set to function No. 8) > switch to normal operation mode (DI terminal is set to function 30) > PLC >
wobble > multi-frequency terminal setting channel (DI terminal is set to function 13 - 16) >
frequency setting channel selection terminal 1 - 3 setting the channel (function of DI terminal is set to 5
- 7) > F00.10 set the frequency setting channel.
9,10: Run command source selection 1, 2.
• In the below table there are 4 kind control modes selected by the different logic combinations of
terminals 1 and 2.
Command source 2 (No 10) Command source 1 (No 9) Selection
0 0 Hold the control mode
0 1 Display panel control mode
1 0 Terminal control mode
1 1 SCI communication control mode
• The inverter can accept that run command source switch changes while running, but only at stop
status all switches can be enabled.
11: Switch to terminal control mode.
• When this terminal function is enabled, the run command source will be forcibly switched to the
terminal control mode.
• The priority of frequency selection is below:
Keypad key Local remote switching function (F00.12 = 1) > command switched to terminal (DI
terminal is set to function 11) > command channel for terminal 1, 2 (DI terminal is set to 9,10 function)
is selected as run command channel > running command channel set in F00.11.
12: External stop command input.
• When enabled, the inverter stops according to F02.13 (stop mode selection). It is valid for all command
source.

―76― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
13 - 16: Multi-step frequency terminal 1 - 4.
• Up to 15 speed references can be set through different logic combinations of terminals.
• The inverter can realise 15-step speed operation through the logical combinations of 4 terminals.
• The inverter can realise 7-step speed operation through the logical combinations of 3 terminals.
• The inverter can realise 3-step speed operation through the logical combinations of 2 terminals.
• The inverter can realise the switch between setting frequency and multi-step frequency through one
terminal function.
• Refer to the below table and figure. K1 is corresponding to terminal 1, K2 is corresponding to terminal 2,
K3 is corresponding to terminal 3 and K4 is corresponding to terminal 4.
K4 (No 16) K3 (No 15) K2 (No 14) K1 (No 13) Frequency setting
0 0 0 0 Setting frequency
0 0 0 1 Multi-step frequency 1 (F06.00)
0 0 1 0 Multi-step frequency 2 (F06.01)
0 0 1 1 Multi-step frequency 3 (F06.02)
0 1 0 0 Multi-step frequency 4 (F06.03)
0 1 0 1 Multi-step frequency 5 (F06.04)
0 1 1 0 Multi-step frequency 6 (F06.05)
0 1 1 1 Multi-step frequency 7 (F06.06)
1 0 0 0 Multi-step frequency 8 (F06.07)
1 0 0 1 Multi-step frequency 9 (F06.08)
1 0 1 0 Multi-step frequency 10 (F06.09)
1 0 1 1 Multi-step frequency 11 (F06.10)
1 1 0 0 Multi-step frequency 12 (F06.11) 6
1 1 0 1 Multi-step frequency 13 (F06.12)
1 1 1 0 Multi-step frequency 14 (F06.13)
1 1 1 1 Multi-step frequency 15 (F06.14)
17,18: Frequency ramp (UP) / (DN).
• If the setting is 17 or 18, the terminal can be used to increase or decrease frequency, and accordingly
enables remote control.
• Increase or decrease rate is determined by F15.12. The function refers to below table.
• This terminal is enabled when F00.10 = 1 (terminal digital setting) or F19.00 = 2 (terminal digital
setting).
UP command (No 17) DN command (No 18) Frequency change trend
0 0 To keep the setting frequency
0 1 To decrease the setting frequency
1 0 To increase the setting frequency
1 1 To keep the setting frequency
19: Clearing auxiliary frequency setting.
• When the setting is 19, this terminal is used to clear the counter to zero, but it is only valid for digital
auxiliary setting.
20,21: Command control input for forward and reverse jog 1 (JOGF1/ JOGR1).
22,23: Command control input for forward and reverse jog 2 (JOGF2/ JOGR2).

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―77―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
24,25: Jog 1 command and direction control input.
• In terminal control mode, if 24 or 25 are enabled, then forward jog or reverse jog operation are enabled.
JOGF is forward jog command and JOGR is reverse jog command.
• It need define parameters F00.15 (jog frequency), F00.16 (jog interval), F03.15 (Acc. time of jog
operation) and F03.16 (Dec. time of jog operation), refering to below table.
Jog direction input Jog command input
Run command
(No. 25) (No. 24)
0 0 Jog command is invalid
1 0 Jog command is invalid
0 1 Jog 1 forward
1 1 Jog 1 reverse
Note: When select 20 and 21, the functions 24 and 25 are invalid.
26,27: Acc. / Dec. time selection terminals 1 and 2.
• Acc. / Dec. time 1 - 4 can be selected through logic combination of the terminals 1 and 2.
• The inverter can realise 4 Groups Acc. / Dec. time selection through the function of 2 Acc. / Dec.
terminals.
• The inverter can realise 2 Groups Acc. / Dec. time selection through the function of 1 Acc. / Dec.
terminals.
Acc. / Dec. terminal 2 (No 27) Acc. / Dec. terminal 1(No 26) Acc. / Dec. selection
0 0 Acc. / Dec. time 1
0 1 Acc. / Dec. time 2
1 0 Acc. / Dec. time 3
1 1 Acc. / Dec. time 4
1123
28: Acc. / Dec. mode selection.
• If the setting is enabled, the S-curve Acc. / Dec. mode will be selected. While the setting is disabled,
linear Acc. / Dec. mode will be selected.
• The Acc. / Dec. mode set by terminal No. 28 function is priority to by F03.00.
29: Acc. / Dec. prohibition.
• If the setting is 29, this terminal can make the motor immune to external signals (except stop
command) and maintain operation at the current speed.
• The function is disabled in the process of Dec. to stop.
30: Switch to ordinary running mode.
• When this function is enabled, the frequency command (including MS function, simple PLC function,
process PID function, wobble function etc.) forced to switch to the ordinary mode operation.
31: Reset the stop status of PLC operation.
• In the stop status of PLC operation, the memorized PLC operating information (operating step,
operating time, operating frequency, etc.) will be cleared when this terminal is enabled, refering to
Group F06.
32: Pausing the process PID.
• If the setting is 32, the process PID function is temporary disabled and the inverter keeps the present
frequency output and continue running.
33: Disabling the process PID.
• To achieve the flexible switch between the process PID and the lower class operation mode.
• When enabled, the operation mode switchs to the lower class.
• The priority of operation mode is as: Jog operation > process PID operation > PLC operation > wobble
operation > MS speed operation > operation.

―78― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
34: Holding PID integral.
• When enabled, the process PID stops increasing and the integrator keeps the present result.
35: Clearing PID integral.
• When enabled, the process PID is cleared.
36: Switch to wobble operation.
• The wobble operation mode selects manual start (set the units of F07.01 to 1).
• If the setting is 36, the wobble function is enabled.
37: Reset the wobble operating status.
• If wobble operation (set F07.00 to 1) is enabled, connecting this terminal can clear all the memorised
information about the wobble operation no matter the inverter is in auto start or manual start mode
(depend on F07.01 setting).
38: DC braking start while stopping.
• To implement DC braking for the motor in stop status through control terminal and then realise motor’s
emergency stop and accuracy location. F02.04 defines the DC braking current.
• When the terminal is active during deceleration and stop, the motor is braked immediately. When
invalid, stop DC braking.
39,40: External pause signal (normally-open/normally-closed input).
• After receiving an external pause command during the running process, the inverter will immediately
stop.
• Once the external signal is removed and the situation meets the running condition, the inverter will
start tracking at high speed.
41,42: Coast to stop (normally-open/normally-closed input).
• The inverter will stop outputting immediately and the load will coast to stop in accordance with the
mechanical inertia when a multi-function terminal is set as 41 or 42.
43: Emergency stop.
6
• After receiving terminal command, the inverter will decelerate to stop during the Dec. time according
to the F03.17 (Dec. time of emergency stop).
44,45: External fault signal (normally-open and normally-closed input).
• If the setting is 44 or 45, the fault signal of external equipment can be input via the terminal, which is
convenient for the inverter to monitor the external equipment and carry out protection according to
the value of F15.17.
• Once the inverter receives the fault signal, it will display external fault.
• The fault signal has two input modes: normally-open and normally-closed input.
46: External reset (RST) input.
• If the setting is 46, the inverter can be reset via this terminal when it has a fault.
• Accordingly the terminal has the same function as the key on the keypad.
47: Switch between motor 1 and motor 2.
• When enabled, it can realise parameters of the two motors to switch.
48: Timing function input. If the setting is 48, the inverter can use the timing function input terminal.
• Refer to parameters F15.25 and F15.26.
49: Clearing the length.
• If the setting is 49, the inverter can use clearing the length input terminal in the fixed length control.
• Refer to parameters F19.26 - F19.34.
50: Clearing the counter to zero. When the setting is 50, this terminal is used to clear the counter to zero.
• It is normally used with Function 51 (counter’s triggering signal input).

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―79―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
51: Counter’s triggering signal input.
• It is built-in counter’s couting pulse input port and can save the current couting value at power loss.
• Pulse’s maximum frequency: 200Hz.
• Refer to parameters F15.37 and F15.38.
52: Length counting input.
• If the setting is 52, it can be used as length input terminal in the fixed length control.
• Refer to parameters F19.26 - F19.34.
53: Pulse frequency input (only DI6 terminal is enabled).
• This terminal is used to input pulse signal as frequency setting.
• See Group F05 parameters for the relationship between input pulse frequency and frequency setting.
54: Main and auxiliary frequency source switching.
56: Speed control / torque control switching.
• When active: F00.00 = 0 is switched from speed control to torque control; F00.00 = 1 is switched from
torque control to speed control.
• Invalid: Determines speed control or torque control according to F00.00 (control mode selection).
57: Torque control torque polarity switching.
• When valid: The torque reference polarity determined by the F21 Group parameter is reversed.
• Invalid: Keep the torque reference polarity determined by the F21 Group parameter.
59: PID parameter switch.
85: Pausing PLC operation.
• If the setting is 85, this terminal is used to pause the PLC operation.
• The inverter will operate at the frequency of the current step when the terminal is enabled, and there is
no timing at PLC operation. When disabled, the timing will continue.
86: Terminal stop DC braking.
• When the inverter is in operation or during shutdown, the inverter will be DC braked immediately after
terminals valid. If there is no stop command, the inverter will restart.
87: Frequency setting channel selection 4.
• See function 5 - 7 instructions.
F15.12 Acc. / Dec. rate of UP/DN terminal 0.00 - 99.99 [1.00 Hz/s]
It defines the change rate of setting frequency via the UP/DN terminal.
F15.13 Terminal detecting interval 0 - 2[0]
0: 2ms.
1: 4ms.
2: 8ms.
F15.14 Terminal detecting filter number 0 - 10000 [2]
The digital input terminal signal should be delayed and confirmed so as to avoid digital input error.
F15.15 Terminal input positive and negative logic setting 000 - 0x1FF [000]
It defines that each bit (binary) of this function represents different physical sources.
• 0: Positive logic: When DI terminals are connected to corresponding common port, this logic is enabled.
Otherwise the logic is disabled.
• 1: Negative logic: When DI terminals are connected to corresponding common port, this logic is disabled.
Otherwise the logic is enabled.
Hundreds Tens Units
Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bit8 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
- - - DI9 DI8 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1

Note: Only when using HD30-EIO will DI7 - DI9 be enabled.

―80― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F15.16 FWD/REV operation mode 0 - 3 [0]
This function defines the four control modes via the external terminals.
• FWD can be selected by DI terminal DIx and represented as “FWD”. At this time, the function of this
terminal should be defined as No. 2 function.
• REV can be selected by DI terminal DIy and represented as “REV”. At this time, the function of this terminal
should be defined as No. 3 function.
0: Two-wire operation mode 1.
1: Two-wire operation mode 2.
• When stop command coming from other sources (or PLC single cycle stop, fixed length stop, terminal
external stop instruction input valid, terminal free stop instruction input valid, inverter failure / external
fault effective) makes the inverter stopping though the terminal logic enabled in the terminal control
mode, there is no run command even the control terminal FWD/REV are still valid.
• If you want the inverter to run again, you should trigger the active FWD and REV.
Run Command
P24 K2 K1
SEL F15.16=0 F15.16=1
FWD K1 0 0 Stop Stop
DIx
REV K2 1 0 Reverse Stop
DIy 0 1 Forward Forward
COM 1 1 Stop Reverse
2: Three-wire operation mode 1.
• If the shift between SB2 and SB3 is disabled, the inverter will hold the control mode.
3: Three-wire operation mode 2.
• If SB2 changes from enabled into disabled, the inverter will keep the same mode.
• DIi can be selected by the DI terminal DIz. At this time, the function of this terminal should be defined as
No. 4 function of “three-wire operation”. 6
F15.16=2 P24 F15.16=3 P24
SEL SEL
FWD SB2 RUN SB2
DIx DIx
Three-wire SB1 Three-wire SB1
DIz DIz
REV SB3 FWD / REV K
DIy DIy
COM COM
SB1: Normally closed stop button K: Direction selection terminal (level on)
SB2: Normally open forward button K = 0(forward) K = 1(reverse)
SB3: Normally open reverse button SB1: Normally closed stop button
SB2: Normally open run button
F15.17 Terminal operating selection due to fault of external equipment 0 - 3 [0]
When there is fault of external equipment, it can select protection.
0: Coast to stop.
1: Emergency stop.
2: Decelerate to stop.
3: Continue to run.
F15.18 DO1 function 0 - 36 [2]
F15.19 DO2 function 0 - 38 [0]
F15.20 RLY1 function 0 - 36 [31]
F15.21 RLY2 function 0 - 36 [0]
F15.22 RLY3 function 0 - 36 [0]
F15.23 RLY4 function 0 - 36 [0]

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―81―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
Note: Only when using HD30-EIO will F15.21 - F15.23 be enabled.
0: Unused. There is no output function and action of the output terminal.
1: Inverter ready.
• The inverter completes power on and no fault occurs, then it can normally run the indicating signal.
2: Inverter is running.
• The inverter is in run status and output indicatiing signal.
3: Inverter is forward running.
• The inverter is forward running the indicating signal.
4: Inverter is reverse running.
• The inverter is reverse running the indicating signal.
5: Inverter is DC braking.
• The inverter is DC braking the indicating signal.
6: Inverter is in zero-frequency status.
• In the zero-frequency range the inverter’s output frequency (including in stop status) outputs the
indication signal.
• Refer to parameters F15.28 and F15.29.
7: Inverter is in zero-frequency running.
• In the zero-frequency range the inverter’s output frequency outputs the indicating signal.
• Refer to parameters F15.28 and F15.29.
9,10: Frequency detection threshold (FDT1, FDT2).
• Refer to F15.31 - F15.35.
11: Frequency arriving signal (FAR).
• Indication signal will be output when the inverter’s output frequency is within the FAR range.
• The FAR is set by F15.27 (FAR range).
12: Limitation of upper limit of frequency.
• The indicating signal will be output if the setting frequency is beyond the upper limit of frequency.
13: Limitation of lower limit of frequency.
• The indicating signal will be output if the setting frequency is lower than the lower limit of frequency.
14: Limitation of upper/lower limits of wobble frequency.
• If the wobble frequency calculated by the central frequency is higher than upper limit of frequency or
lower than the lower limit of frequency (F00.09), signal will be output, as shown in figure.
• When F07.00 = 1 (using the wobble function), this terminal function is enabled.
Running frequency Before limiting
amplitude
Upper limit of frequency

Central frequency
After limiting
amplitude
Time

Out signal
limitation of upper/lower limits
of wobble frequency
15: Simple PLC operating status indication.
• The indicating signal will be output when the inverter is at simple PLC operating.
16: Simple PLC pausing indication.
• The indicating signal will be output if the simple PLC operation is suspended by external terminals.

―82― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
17: Simple PLC cycle completion indication.
• The indicating signal will be output if one cycle of PLC operation is finished.
18: Completion of simple PLC operation stages.
• The indicating signal will be output if the current step of PLC operation is finished.
19: Completion of simple PLC operation.
• The indicating signal will be output if the PLC operation is finished.
20: Output data from SCI communication.
• Output indicating signal of open collector or relay is controlled by the SCI communication directly.
21: Preset operating time out.
• The indicating signal will be output if the inverter’s operating time reaches the preset operating time
(F15.36).
Note: The No. 17, 18, 19 and 21 functions output indicating signal which is single pulse signal, 500ms.
22: Timing function output.
• If the setting is 22, the inverter can use the timing function output terminal.
• Refer to parameters F15.25 and F15.26.
23: Preset counting value reach.
24: Indicating counting value reach.
• Refer to F15.37 and F15.38.
25: Setting length arrive.
• The indicating signal will be output if the inverter’s actual length reaches the preset length.
26: Indication of motor 1 and motor 2.
• According to the current motor selection, output corresponding indicating signal.
• When the inverter controls the motor 1, this signal will be disabled; while controls the motor 2, it will
output the indicating signal.
27: Analog input overrun output. 6
• When the analog value exceeds the upper or lower limit, the indicator is output.
• Refer to F15.39 - F15.42.
29: Undervoltage lock-up signal (LU).
• When the DC bus voltage is lower than the undervoltage threshold, the inverter will output
undervoltage signal. The LED on the keypad will display “-Lu-”.
30: Overload signal (OL).
• The indicating signal can be output when the inverter’s output current value is higher than that defined
by F20.01(overload pre-alarm detection threshold) and the overload time is longer than that defined by
F20.02 (overload pre-alarm detection time).
31: Inverter fault.
• The inverter will output fault signal when it has a fault.
32: External fault.
• The indicating signal can be output when the inverter detects the external fault signal via terminal.
33: Inverter auto-reset fault.
• The indicating signal can be output when the inverter is during fault auto-reset.
35: Dormancy instruction function.
36: The system is running.
• The indicator is output when the drive is in operation or during sleep or when the analog override is
waiting for restart.
38: High-frequency output (only DO2).
• DO2 can be selected as high-frequency output. Refer to F16.21.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―83―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F15.24 Output terminal positive and negative logic selection 00 - 0x3F [00]
It defines that each bit (binary) of this function represents different physical sources.
• 0: Positive logic: When output terminals are connected to corresponding common port, this logic is
enabled. Otherwise the logic is disabled.
• 1: Negative logic: When output terminals are connected to corresponding common port, this logic is
disabled. Otherwise the logic is enabled.
Tens Units
Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
- - RLY4 RLY3 RLY2 RLY1 DO2 DO1

Note: Only when using HD30-EIO will RLY2 - RLY4 be enabled.

F15.25 ON side delay time of timing function 0.00 - 300.00 [0.00s]
F15.26 OFF side delay time of timing function
F15.25 and F15.26 can be used to set the ON/OFF side delay time (dead area) of the timing function output
relative to the input.
• The timing function output will be ON when the ON time of timing function is longer than that defined
by F15.25.
• The timing function output will be OFF when the OFF time of timing function delays behind that defined
by F15.26.
The timing function operation figure is shown as follows:
Timing function input ON ON

Timing function output ON ON

F15.25 F15.26 F15.25 F15.26

F15.27 FAR range 0.00 - 100.00 [2.50Hz]
Output
The pulse signal will be output if the inverter’s F15.27
Preset frequency
output frequency is within the FAR range. As F15.27
shown in the right figure.
Time

Output
DO
Time

―84― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F15.28 Zero-frequency operation threshold 0.00 - upper limit [0.00Hz]
F15.29 Zero-frequency hysteresis
Running frequency
F15.28 and F15.29 are used to set the F15.28
F15.29
zero-frequency operation output control Time
function, please see the right figure.
Running status

Zero-frequency
running output
Time

Zero-frequency output
Time

F15.30 FDT1 detection mode 0,1 [0]

0: Detect according to the reference frequency.
1: Detect according to the output frequency.
F15.31 FDT1 level 0.00 - upper limit [50.00Hz]
F15.32 FDT1 lag 0.00 - upper limit [1.00Hz]
Output frequency
The indicating signal can be output if the setting frequency
F15.31
F15.30 is higher than certain frequency (F15.31), and F15.32
becomes disabled when the setting frequency is lower than FL
certain frequency of FDT1 level (F15.31 - F15.32). Please refer
Time
to FL of the right figure.

DO
6
Time

F15.33 FDT2 detection mode 0,1 [0]

0: Detect according to the reference frequency.
1: Detect according to the output frequency.
F15.34 FDT2 level 0.00 - upper limit [50.00Hz]
F15.35 FDT2 lag 0.00 - upper limit [1.00Hz]
Refer to parameters F15.31 and F15.32.
F15.36 Preset operating time 0 – 65535 [0h]
When the total operating time reaches the preset operating time (F15.36), the inverter will output an
indicating signal (500ms).

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―85―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
No. Name Description Range[factory setting]
F15.37 Preset counting value arriving F15.38 - 9999 [0]
F15.38 Specified counting value arriving 0 - F15.37 [0]
F15.37 presents that when the number of pulse input by the DI terminals (set as No. 51 function) reaches a
certain quantity, the DO terminals or relay will send an indicating signal.
F15.38 presents that when the number of pulse input by the DI terminals (set as No. 51 function) reaches a
specified quantity, the DO terminals or relay will send an indicating signal until the pulse number hits the
preset counting value.
For instance:
If F15.37 is set to 7 and F15.38 is set to 3, DO1 selects preset count arriving function (F15.18 = 23), DO2
selects specified count arriving (F15.19 = 24), and DI1 selects counter trigger signal input function (F15.00 =
51).
Sequence of counting value arriving is shown in figure:
• DO2 will output an indicating signal when DI1 inputs the third pulse until the preset count value reachs
seven.
• DO1 will output an indicating signal when DI1 inputs the seventh pulse; output signal of DO1 returns to
low level when DI1 inputs the eighth pulse.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DI1

DO1

DO2
F15.39 Ananlogue input over-limitation selection 0000 - 1133 [0000]
If the corresponding analog > F15.40 or analog < F15.41, and continued F15.42 time, the overrun check.
After the limit detection, when F15.41 ≤ analog ≤ F15.40, according to thousands to determine whether the
automatic operation of the inverter.
Unit: action drive when the input exceeds the limit Hundreds: Analog overrun detection conditions
• 0: Free stop. • 0: Always detected.
• 1: Emergency shutdown. • 1: Run command is detected.
• 2: Deceleration stop. Thousands : Automatical selection when analog
• 3: No action. overrun is detected
Ten: Select the analog input port • 0: Do not allow automatic operation.
• 0: No analog port. • 1: Allows automatic operation.
• 1: Operation panel potentiometer. Note: Thousands are valid only in terminal two-wire
• 2: AI1 port. mode.
• 3: AI2 port.
F15.40 Analog input overrun upper limit F15.41 - 100.0 [100.0%]
F15.41 Analog input overrun down limit 0.0 - F15.40 [0.0%]
F15.42 Analog overrun detection time 0.00 - 50.00 [5.00s]
F15.43 Terminal output delay 0.0 - 100.0[0.0s]
F15.44 Start analog overrun detection time 0.00 - 50.00 [15.00s]

―86― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
6.2.15 F16: Analogue I/O Terminal Parameters
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F16.00 Display panel with potentiometer function 0 - 19 [0]
F16.01 AI1 function 0 - 19 [2]
F16.02 AI2 function 0 - 19 [5]
F16.03 AI3 function 0 - 19 [0]
F16.04 AI4 function 0 - 19 [0]
Note:
1. Only when using keypad with potentiometer can F16.00 is enabled.
2. Only when using HD30-EIO will F16.03 and F16.04 be enabled.
0: Unused.
1: Upper limit frequency setting source.
• When F00.07 = 1 (upper limit frequency setting source is set by analogue input), the upper limit
frequency will be set by the input voltage value corresponding to the analogue source which selects
this function.
2: Frequency setting source.
• When F00.10 = 3 (frequency setting source is set by analogue input), the setting frequency will be set
by the input voltage value corresponding to the analogue source which selects this function.
3: Auxiliary frequency reference.
• When F19.00 = 4 (auxiliary frequency reference is set by AI analogue), the auxiliary frequency will be
set by the input voltage value corresponding to the analogue source which selects this function.
4: Process PID reference.
• When F04.01 = 1 (process PID reference is set by AI analogue), the process PID reference will be set by
the input voltage value corresponding to the analogue source which selects this function.
5: Process PID feedback.
• When F04.02 = 0 (AI analogue inputs process PID feedback), the process PID feedback will be set by the
6
input voltage value corresponding to the analogue source which selects this function.
6: Process PID regulating uper limit.
• When F04.11 = 1 (upper limit value of the PID regulator is set by AI analogue), the process PID
regulating upper limit will be set by the input voltage value corresponding to the analogue source
which selects this function.
7: Process PID regulating lower limit.
• When F04.12 = 1 (lower limit value of the PID regulator is set by AI analogue), the process PID
regulating lower limit will be set by the input voltage value corresponding to the analogue source
which selects this function.
8: Motor overheating signal input.
• Connect electronic thermistor embedded motor stator coils to the inverter’s analogue input, see 8.1.
• Refer to parameters F20.06 and F20.07 about the thermistor.
9: Motor 1 forward rotation torque limit..
• When F10.09 unit = 1 (motor 1 forward rotation torque limit channel set by analog), motor 1 forward
rotation torque limit is set by corresponding voltage of the analogue channel
10: Motor 1 reverse electric torque limit.
• When the F10.09 ten=1 (motor 1 reverse rotation torque limit channel set by analog), motor 1 for
reverse rotation torque limit is set by corresponding voltage of the analogue channel
11: Motor 1 forward regeneration rotation torque limit.
• When F10.10 unit = 1 (motor 1 forward rotation torque limit channel set by analog), motor 1 forward
regeneration rotation torque limit is set by corresponding voltage of the analogue channel.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―87―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
12: Motor 1 reverse regeneration rotation torque limit.
• When F10.10 unit = 1 (motor 1 reverse rotation torque limit channel set by analog), motor 1 reverse
regeneration rotation torque limit is set by corresponding voltage of the analogue channel.
13: Torque command given.
• When F21.00 = 1 (channel for torque command given is set by analog), torque is set by input voltage
corresponding analogue channel of this selected functon.
15: Torque control up limit frequency.
• When F21.04 = 2 (controlled by speed of limit torque control by analogue), speed limit is set by input
voltage corresponding analogue channel of this selected functon.
16: Motor 2 Forward rotation electrical torque limit.
• When F13.44 unit = 1 (channel of Forward rotation electrical torque limit is set by analogue), motor 2
Forward rotation electrical torque limit is set by input voltage corresponding analogue channel of this
selected functon.
17: Motor 2 reverse rotation electrical torque limit.
• When F13.44 ten = 1 (channel of reverse rotation electrical torque limit is set by analogue), motor 2
reverse rotation electrical torque limit is set by input voltage corresponding analogue channel of this
selected functon.
18: Motor 2 Forward regeneration torque limit.
• When F13.45 unit = 1 (motor 2 Forward regeneration torque limit is set by analogue), motor 2 Forward
regeneration torque limit t is set by input voltage corresponding analogue channel of this selected
functon.
19: Motor 2 reverse regeneration torque limit.
• When F13.45 ten = 1 (motor 2 reverse regeneration torque limit is set by analogue), motor 2 reverse
regeneration torque limit t is set by input voltage corresponding analogue channel of this selected
functon.
F16.05 AI1 bias -100.0 - 100.0 [0.0%]
F16.08 AI2 bias
F16.11 AI3 bias
F16.14 AI4 bias
F16.06 AI1 gain -10.00 - 10.00 [1.00]
F16.09 AI2 gain
F16.12 AI3 gain
F16.15 AI4 gain
F16.07 AI1 filtering time 0.01 - 10.00 [0.05s]
F16.10 AI2 filtering time
F16.13 AI3 filtering time
F16.16 AI4 filtering time
Note: Only when using HD30-EIO will F16.11 - F16.16 be enabled.
When select AI1 - AI4 inputs as open-loop frequency setting source, the relationship between the analogue
input and the setting frequency is shown as figure:
Analogue Analogue Analogue input gain Analogue value
actual value input filtering Analogue input bias after calculating

AI display value AI display value

(after calculating)
The analogue voltage reasults from setting frequency signal disposed by analogue input filtering, bias and
gain. The relationship between the analogue voltage and the setting frequency is set by parameters of
Group F05.

―88― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
• Analogue input gain and bias are involved in analogue calculation is as following formula: Y = kX + b.
• Here: Y is the calculated analogue, X is the value before adjusting, k is the analogue input gain (F16.06,
F16.09, F16.12, F16.15), and b is the analogue input bias (F16.05, F16.08, F16.11, F16.14).
• F16.07, F16.10, F16.13, F16.16 define the filtering time. It is used to filter the analogue signal.The longer
the filter time is, the higher the immunity level is, but the response time is prolonged. That is, the shorter
the filter time is, the quicker the response time is, but the lower the immunity level.
• When current input is selected for AI2, 2 and 3 pins of jumper CN6 on control board should be shorted.
F16.17 Maximum input pulse frequency 0.0 - 50.0 [10.0kHz]
When set the DI6 terminal as pulse input, F16.17 defines the maximum input pulse frequency.
F16.18 Input pulse filtering time 0 - 500 [10ms]
It is used to filter the input pulse frequency and filter out the small fluctuations in the pulse frequency.
F16.19 AO1 function 0 - 20 [2]
F16.20 AO2 function 0 - 20 [0]
F16.21 High-speed pulse output function 0 - 20 [0]
0: Unused.
1,2: Output frequency, reference frquency (0 - maximum output frequency).
3: Motor RPM (0 - maximum output frequency corresponding to RPM).
4: Output current (0 - twice motor’s rated current).
5: Output current (0 - twice motor’s rated current).
6: Torque command(0 - 3times motor rated torque).
10: Output torque (0 - 3 times motor’s rated torque).
11: Output voltage (0 - 1.2 times inverter’s rated voltage).
12: Bus voltage (0 - 2.2 times inverter’s rated voltage).
13: Output power (0 - twice motor’s rated power).
6
14: AI1 input (0 - 10V).
15: AI2 input (-10 - 10V / 0 - 20mA).
16: AI3 input (-10 - 10V / 0 - 20mA).
17: AI4 input (-10 - 10V / 0 - 20mA).
18,19: Output frequency, reference frequency (-1 times - 1 times maximum output frequency).
20: Set frequency (0 - max. output frequency).
F16.22 Analogue output AO1 bias -100.0 - 100.0 [0.0%]
F16.23 Analogue output AO1 gain 0.0 - 200.0 [100.0%]
If the user needs to adjust the proportional relationship of the AO1 output, it can be realized by the output
gain. The analog output and F16.22, F16.23 curve as shown below.
• Analog output gain and offset participation in the analog calculation formula: Actual output = F16.23 ×
Calculated value + F16.22
Value after calculating (V) Value after calculating (V)
100% 100%
F16.22=50% F16.22=0
F16.23=50% F16.23=200%
F16.22=0
50% F16.22=0 F16.23=100%
F16.23=100%
Value before Value before
calculating (V) calculating (V)
0V 10V 0V 5V 10V
• AO1 analog output can be 0 - 20mA current signal output through 2, 3pin short of CN7, CN8.
• Achieve 4 - 20mA current signal output: F16.22 is set to 20.0%, F16.23 is set to 80.0% (4mA corresponds
to 0% of analog output, 20mA corresponds to 100% of analog output).

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―89―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F16.24 Analogue output AO2 bias -100.0 - 100.0 [0.0%]
F16.25 Analogue output AO2 gain 0.0 - 200.0 [100.0%]
Refer to parameters F16.22 and F16.23.
F16.26 DO2 maximum output pulse frequency 0.1 - 50.0 [10.0kHz]
It defines the DO2 terminal allowable maximum output frequency.
F16.27 Keypad potentiometer offset -100.0 - 100.0 [0.0%]
F16.28 Keypad potentiometer gain 0.00 - 10.00 [1.00]

―90― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
6.2.16 F17: SCI Communication Parameters
Refer to Appendix C (Page 165) for the communication function.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F17.00 Data format 0 - 6 [0]
0: 1-8-2 format, no parity, RTU. 2: 1-8-1 format, odd parity, RTU.
1: 1-8-1 format, even parity, RTU. 6: 1-8-11 format, no parity, RTU.
F17.01 Baud rate selection 0 - 8 [3]
0: 1200bps. 3: 9600bps. 6: 57600bps.
1: 2400bps. 4: 19200bps. 7: 76800bps.
2: 4800bps. 5: 38400bps. 8: 115200bps.
F17.02 Local address 0 - 247 [2]
F17.02 = 0, it means broadcast address.
F17.03 Host PC response time 0 - 1000 [1ms]
F17.04 Time threshold for detecting communication status 0.0 - 600.0 [0.0 s]
When the time at no communication data exceeds the setting time of F17.04, it will be considered as
communication time out.
• F17.04 = 0, it will not detect communication time out.
F17.05 Detecting time at communication error 0.0 - 600.0s [0.0]
When the time at communication error exceeds the setting time of F17.05, it will be considered as
communication error detection.
• F17.05 = 0, it will not detect the communication error.
F17.06 Action selection at communication time out 0 - 3 [3]
F17.07 Action selection at communication fault 0 - 3 [3]
F17.08 Action selection at communication peripheral device fault 0 - 3 [1] 6
F17.06 defines the action selection at commmunication time out.
F17.07 defines the action selection at communication fault.
In the communication command setting mode, F17.08 will define the action selection when
communication peripheral device fault is alarmed.
0: Coast to stop. 2: Decelerate to stop.
1: Emergency stop. 3: Continue to run.
F17.09 Communication write function parameter of storage EEPROM 00 - 11 [01]
method selection
When used to change parameter in selecting communicaition, whether stored in EEPROM or not.
Unit: Except of F00.13, F19.03, EEPROM storeage Ten: For F00.13, F19.03, EEPROM storeage
selection in communication selection in communication
0: Not stored in EEPROM. 0: Not stored in EEPROM.
1: Stored in EEPROM. 1: Stored in EEPROM.
Note:
1. When 10 is set to 1, it may damage the inverter. Please be careful!
2. Only when using the communication write function parameter, and function code is 0x06 or 0x10, will F17.09
be valid. Refer to of Appendix C for details.
F17.10 Detecting time of network communicaiton overtime 0.0 - 600.0 [0.0s]
The time interval between two received correct data (including local or non-native data) continues to
exceed F17.10 and is detected for communication timeout. The timeout is checked and the timeout
protection is selected according to F17.06.
• F17.10 = 0, the communication timeout is not detected.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―91―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
6.2.17 F18: Display Control Parameters
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F18.00 Language selection 0,1 [0]
Only when using LCD keypad will F18.00 be enabled.
0: Chinese.
1: English.
F18.01 Displaying contrast of the LCD keypad 1 - 10 [5]
To select LCD displaying contrast.
• Only when using LCD keypad will F18.01 be enabled.
F18.02 Set the display parameter 1 during operation 0 - 49 [8]
F18.03 Set the display parameter 2 during operation 0 - 49 [7]
F18.04 Set the display parameter 3 during operation 0 - 49 [9]
F18.05 Set the display parameter 4 during operation 0 - 49 [13]
F18.06 Set the display parameter 5 during operation 0 - 49 [14]
F18.07 Set the display parameter 6 during operation 0 - 49 [18]
F18.08 Set the display parameter 1 at stop 0 - 49 [7]
F18.09 Set the display parameter 2 at stop 0 - 49 [18]
F18.10 Set the display parameter 3 at stop 0 - 49 [20]
F18.11 Set the display parameter 4 at stop 0 - 49 [22]
F18.12 Set the display parameter 5 at stop 0 - 49 [43]
F18.13 Set the display parameter 6 at stop 0 - 49 [44]
Defines the contents of the operation panel display.
Can be loop displayed by the key of keypad operation status and stop status.
0: Unused. 17: Output power. 33: Set the line speed.
1: Inverter’s rated current. 18: DC bus voltage. 34: Reference line speed.
3: The inverter status. 19: Potentiometer input voltage. 37: Process PID reference.
• Refer to parameter d00.10. 20: AI1 input voltage. 38: Process PID feedback.
4: Master setting frequency 21: AI1 input voltage (after 39: Process PID error.
source. disposal). 40: Process PID integral value.
5: Master setting frequency. 22: AI2 input voltage. 41: Process PID output.
6: Auxiliary setting frequency. 23: AI2 input voltage (after 42: External couting value.
7: Setting frequency. disposal). 43: Input terminal status.
8: Reference frequency (after Acc. 24: AI3 input voltage. • Bit0 - Bit8 are corresponding
/ Dec.). 25: AI3 input voltage (after to DI1 - DI9.
9: Output frequency. disposal). 44: Output terminal status.
• At running state, 26: AI4 input voltage. • Bit0 - Bit5are corresponding
indicator is flashing. 27: AI4 input voltage (after to DO1, DO2, RLY1 - RLY4.
10: Setting RPM. disposal). 45: MODBUS communication
11: Running RPM. 28: DI6 terminal pulse input status.
• At running state, frequency. 46: Actual length.
indicator is flashing. 29: AO1 output. 47: Total length.
13: Output voltage. 30: AO2 output. 48: Total time at power on (hour).
14: Output current. 31: High-speed output pulse 49: Total time at running (hour).
15: Torque given. frequency.
16: Output torque. 32: Heatsink temperature.

F18.14 Frequency display gain 0.1 - 160.0 [1.0]

F18.15 Maximum line speed 0 - 65535 [1000]

―92― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F18.16 Line speed display accuracy 0 - 3 [0]
0: Integer.
1: One decimal.
2: Two decimal.
3: Three decimal.
Note: The maximum linear velocity must be newly set when the display accuracy is changed.

6.2.18 F19: Function-boost Parameters

Frequency auxiliary setting sources (F19.00 - F19.06)
The multi-step frequency of HD30 is the result of both master setting frequency and auxiliary setting
frequency.
F19.00 defines the auxiliary frequency setting sources. When the auxiliary frequency setting source is
the same as the master frequency setting source (except analogue setting), the auxiliary frequency
setting source will be disabled.
Main frequency:
Digital setting F00.10 = 0, 1, 2
Analogue setting F00.10 = 3, 6-10
Pulse setting F00.10 = 4 Frequency
percentage Set
±
adjustment frequency
Auxiliary frequency: F19.05, F19.06
Digital setting F19.00 = 1, 2, 3
Analogue setting F19.00 = 4, 7-11
Pulse setting F19.00 = 5 6
Process PID output F19.00 = 6

Pre-treatment
Keypad Storing in power failure
Initial value
Auxiliary set frequency

Digital and stop treatment

Terminal UP/DN F19.03
Auxiliary frequency

F19.04
setting channel

Communicaiton Digital
F19.00

AI Analogue Gain Curve selection

treatment of external given
Pulse Pulse F19.02 F05.00

Process PID

Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]

F19.00 Auxiliary frequency setting source selection 0 - 11 [0]
It defines the setting source of the auxiliary frequency.
• When set F19.00 as 1, 2, the initial value is set by F19.03.
• When set F19.00 as 4, 5, 7 - 10, the initial value is set by the actual analogue input. Refer to F05.00 about
the frequency relation characteristic curve selections.
• When set F19.00 as 6, set the auxiliary setting frequency according to the relationship of PID setting and
feedback.
• Please refer to the above figure.
0: No auxiliary source.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―93―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
1: Keypad setting. adjusted by and keys on the keypad.
2: Terminal setting. adjusted by terminal UP / DN.
3: SCI communication setting. The initial value is 0.
4: AI analogue setting.
5: Terminal pulse setting.
6: Process PID output.
7 - 10: AI1 - AI4.
11: Keypad potentiometer.
F19.01 Master/Auxiliary setting calculation 00 - 41 [10]
Define the relationship between final setting Tens: Frequency source switch selection
frequency and main / aux frequency. 0: Main.
Switch frequency by No. 54 function of DI terminal 1: Main and auxiliary operations.
(switching main/aux frequnecy source). 2: Main and auxiliary switching.
Units: Main and auxiliary operations 3: Master and main auxiliary operation switch.
0: Master setting + auxiliary setting. 4: Auxiliary and main auxiliary operation switch.
1: Master setting - auxiliary setting.
F19.01setting value
DI=54
00 10 20 30 40 01 11 21 31 41
0 Main Main+Aux Aux Main+AuxMain+Aux Main Main-Aux Aux Main-AuxMain-Aux
1 Main Main+Aux Main Main Aux Main Main-Aux Main Main Aux
F19.02 Analogue auxiliary setting coefficient 0.00 - 9.99 [1.00]
First, calculate the gain by using F19.02, then calculate auxiliary frequency according to the frequency
characteristic curve of Group F05. When F19.00 = 4, 5, 7-10, F19.02 is enabled.
F19.03 Initial value of digital auxiliary frequency 0.00 - F00.06 [0.00]
Only when F19.00 = 1 or 2 will F19.03 be enabled and provide the initial value for the two methods.
F19.04 Control selection of digital auxiliary frequency 00 - 11 [00]
Only when F19.00 = 1 or 2 will F19.04 be enabled.
Units: Save selection at power outage
• 0: Not save auxiliary frequency at power outage.
• 1: The auxiliary frequency will be saved to F19.03 at power outage.
Tens: Frequency disposal when the inverter stops
• 0: Maintain the auxiliary frequency when the inverter stops.
• 1: The auxiliary frequency clears to zero when the inverter stops.
F19.05 Adjustment selection of setting frequency 0 - 2 [1]
F19.06 Adjustment coefficient of setting frequency 0.0 - 200.0 [100.0%]
F19.05 and F19.06 is to set the adjustment mode of setting frequency (the compounded frequency is
computed by master setting frequency plus auxiliary setting frequency).
0: No adjustment.
• Setting frequency = synthetic frequency.
1: To adjust as per the max. output frequency of F00.06.
• Setting frequency = synthetic frequency + F00.06 × (F19.06 – 100%).
2: To adjust as per the current frequency.
• Setting frequency = synthetic frequency × F19.06.

―94― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction

Fan control (F19.07 - F19.08)

Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F19.07 Control selection of cooling fan 0 - 2 [0]
F19.08 Cooling fan controls delaying time 0.0 - 600.0 [60.0s]
0: Auto stop mode.
• The fan runs all the time when the inverter is in running status. After the inverter stops for the time set
by F19.08, the fan stops if the inverter is not overheated. The fan will continue running if the overheat
protection is activated.
1: Immediate stop mode.
• The fan runs all the time when the inverter is in running status and stops when the inverter stops.
2: The fan runs continuously when power on.
• The fan runs continuously after the inverter is switched on.

Zero-frequency operation (F19.10 - F19.11)

Refer to below figure for the details.

Fcmd = Setting frequency Fmin = Zero-frequency threshold (F19.10)

Flow = Lower limit frequency (F00.09) H = Target frequency
Fstart = Start DWELL frequency (F02.02) F02.03 (Keeping time of start frequency)
No
Fcmd＞Flow Fcmd＝Flow

Yes

Fcmd＞Fmin
No Handle by
F19.11 setting
F19.11＝1
Yes
Keep stop 6
No

Yes Fcmd＝F19.11
Confirmed frequency

No
Fcmd＞Fstart

Yes

H＝Fstart

Reach No
F2.03 or
no
Yes

H＝Fcmd

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―95―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F19.10 Zero-frequency threshold 0.00 - upper limit [1.00Hz]
F19.11 Action selection at setting frequency is lower than 0 - 3 [0]
zero-frequency threshold
0: Run according to frequency command.
1: Holding stop, no output.
2: Run according to zero-frequency threshold.
3: Run according to zero-frequency.

Trip-free operation during momentary power loss (F19.12 - F19.15)

The inverter can automatically perform low-voltage compensation when the voltage decreases or
instantaneous under-voltage occurs. The inverter can continue to operate without tripping by
reducing its output frequency and feedback energy via motor.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F19.12 Trip-free selection at momentary power loss 0,1 [0]
If the inverter is momentarily lost during running Voltage
(main circuit DC bus voltage VDC < F19.15), the Bus voltage
inverter maintains the DC bus voltage by reducing F19.15
the output frequency to avoid undervoltage Time
shutdown.

Frequency
0: This function is disabled. Setting
1: This function is enabled. And low-voltage
frequency
Given
compensation is activated. frequency Time

F19.13 Dec. time at voltage compensation 0.1 - 6000.0 [5.0s]

When the instantaneous stop is enabled, the inverter will judge the voltage difference, the voltage
compensation gain according to the current DC bus voltage and the F19.15 instantaneous stop operation,
adjust the output frequency in real time, and maintain the DC bus voltage to avoid the undervoltage
shutdown.
• If F19.13 is set too small, the feedback energy of motor will be too large and overvoltage protection might
be activated.
• If F19.13 is set too big, the feedback energy of motor will be too small to achieve voltage compensation
effect.
F19.15 Reference voltage of trip-free operation at 220V inverter: 210 - 370 [248V]
momentary power loss 380V inverter: 400 - 670 [430V]

Restart after power failure (F19.16 - F19.17)

This function decides in different control modes whether the inverter starts automatically or not and
the delay time for restart when the inverter is switched off and then switched on.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F19.16 Restart after power failure 0,1 [0]
0: This function is disabled.
1: This function is enabled. In the terminal two-wire control mode and suddenly power failure during
running process, when the inverter is powered on again and the terminal is still enabled, it will wait certain
time defined by F19.17 and then start operation automatically.
F19.17 Delay time for restart after power failure 0.00 - 10.00 [2.00s]

―96― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction

Protection of stall overvoltage (F19.18 - F19.19)

During Dec., the motor’s decelerate rate may be lower than that of the inverter’s output frequency
due to the load inertia. At this time, the motor will feed the energy back to the inverter, resulting in
voltage rise on the inverter's DC bus. If no measures taken, the inverter will trip due to overvoltage.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F19.18 Overvoltage suppression gain 0.000 - 1.000 [0.500]
0: Overvoltage stall is prohibited.
0.001 - 1.000: Turn on overvoltage stall.
• It in running, he bus voltage is greater than F19.19 overvoltage stall when the bus voltage is compared
with F19.19, the inverter automatically increases the output frequency to avoid more energy being fed
back to converter by the load.
• Overvoltage suppression gain setting is too small to effectively suppress DC bus voltage rise.
• The overvoltage suppression gain setting is too large, which may cause the output frequency to
fluctuate and cause the whole system to oscillate. The deceleration time may be appropriate to increase
during deceleration to avoid the system shock caused by overvoltage stall.
Note: When the overvoltage stall condition is held for more than 1 minute, the inverter reports overvoltage stall
failure (E0007) and stops the output.
F19.19 Stall overvoltage point 220V inverter: 350 - 400 [390V]
380V inverter: 650 - 790 [690V]
When the inverter is overvoltage during operation, it is possible to increase the overvoltage stall gain and
reduce the overvoltage stall.
Overvoltage stall with brake components:
• Overvoltage stall should normally be disabled
Voltage
(F19.18 = 0) when the brake assembly is installed
in the inverter.
F19.19
Busbar voltage
6
• The inverter may be overvoltage protected when Time
the energy is instantaneously fed back and the
braking components can not release the feedback Frequency Reference
energy in time. In this case, overvoltage frequency
protection can be avoided by enabling Setting frequency
overvoltage stall. The value of the stall point Time
(F19.19) should be greater than the operating △F = F19.18× (VDC - F19.19)
voltage point of the brake assembly.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―97―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.

Auto current limiting function (F19.20 - F19.21)

Auto current limiting function is used to limit the load current in real time smaller than the auto
current limiting threshold (F19.21). Therefore the inverter will not trip due to surge current. This
function is especially suitable for applications with big load inertia or big change of load.
In auto current limiting process, the inverter’s output frequency may change; therefore, it is
recommended not to enable this function when stable output frequency is required.
Note: When the frequency converter is used for potential load (lift, hoist, etc.), it should be forbidden to ensure the safety of
the whole system: Instantaneous stop (F19.12 - F19.15), undervoltage restart (F19.16 - F19.17), overvoltage stall (F19.18 -
F19.19), automatic current limiting (F19.20 - F19.22).
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F19.20 Automatic current limiting gain 0.000 - 1.000 [0.500]
When the inverter output current exceeds F19.21, the inverter will automatically suppress further increase of
output current to avoid overcurrent protection.
• The automatic current limiting gain should be adjusted according to the actual load conditions:
• Automatic current limiting gain setting is too small to effectively suppress the increase in output
current.
• The automatic current limit gain setting is too large, which may cause the output frequency to fluctuate
and cause the entire system to oscillate.
• F19.20 = 0, the automatic current limit is invalid.
F19.21 Auto current limiting threshold 20.0 - 200.0 [G: 150%] [P: 110%]
F19.21 defines the threshold of auto current limiting. It is a percentage of the inverter’s rated current.

Terminal detecting (F19.23)

Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F19.23 Enabled mode of terminal run command 0,1 [0]
0: Rise edge enabled mode.
• For many applications, the inverter is not allowed to auto-run to avoid device damage and ensure safety
due to no person interference at power on. In these applications, when the inverter’s power is initialized
and ready to run, it can not start to run until the terminal run command is given.
1: Level enabled mode.
• For certain applications, when ensured personal safety and device safety it need the inverter
immediately run at power on in order to provide automation and efficiency. In these application, the
inverter will immediately run as soon as the terminal run command is given whether before or after
power on.

―98― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction

Braking unit (F19.24 - F19.25, F19.40 – F19.41)

Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F19.24 Action voltage of braking unit 220V inverter： 330 - 400 [380V]
380V inverter： 630 - 750 [720V]
Note: Only the frequency converter with built-in brake unit releases energy through the braking resistor, and the
energy release only occurs when the inverter is running.
F19.25 Flux brake enabled 0,1 [0]
0: Prohibited.
1: Enable, automatically disable overvoltage stall function.
• By increasing the loss of the motor, you can decelerate faster without braking resistors.
• The flux brake effect can be adjusted by F19.40, F19.41.
• Valid only when V/f control is active.
Note: Do not use this function during frequent braking, which may damage the motor.

Fixed length arrive and stop function (F19.26 - F19.34)

This Group is used to realize fixed length stop function. As the right figure:
The inverter inputs the count pulse from the terminal
(multi-function terminal is set as No. 52 function) and gets Measuring
speed shaft
the count length according to the measuring number of
pulses per revolution (F19.31) and shaft diameter (F19.30).
Then modify the count length and obtain the actual length
(F19.27) via length ratio (F19.28) and length checking Inverter Motor
coefficient (F19.29) too. 6
The formula is as follows:
F19.27 = Counted length × F19.28 ÷ F19.29
Counted length = Counted pulse number ÷ F19.31 × F19.30 × π
If F19.27 ≥ F19.26, the inverter will automatically send the stop command. Before running again, it
need clear F19.27 or changed to F19.27 < F19.26. Otherwise the inverter can’t be started.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F19.26 Preset length 0 - 65535 [0m]
F19.27 Actual length 0 - 65535 [0m]
F19.28 Length ratio 0.001 - 30.000 [1.000]
F19.29 Length checking coefficient 0.001 - 1.000 [1.000]
F19.30 Measuring shaft diameter 1.00 - 100.00 [10.00cm]
F19.31 Number of pulses per revolution 1 - 9999 [1]
F19.32 Length arrive and output function selection 0,1 [0]
0: Output level signal.
1: Output 500ms pulse.
F19.33 Record of length disposal after length arrive 0,1 [0]
F19.34 Record of length disposal at stop 0,1 [0]
0: Auto-clear.
1: No change.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―99―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.

Auxiliary PID limit (F19.35 - F19.36)

Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F19.35 Auxiliary PID output limit 0.0 - 100.0 [100.0%]
Auxiliary frequency selected as PID, PID takes as PID adjustment up limit F19.35×main given frequency.
F19.36 Auxiliary PID output limit increase 0.0 - 100.0 [0.0%]
Auxiliray PIDoutput limit = output limit comfirmed byF19.35 + F19.36×F00.06.

Frequency adjust range (F19.37)

Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F19.37 Frequency adjust range selection 000 - 111 [100]
Unit : The main frequency calculation range Hundreds: Synthetic frequency calculation range
• 0: 0 to maximum frequency. • 0: 0 to the upper limit frequency.
• 1: Negative maximum frequency to maximum • 1: Negative upper limit frequency to upper limit
frequency. frequency.
Ten: Auxiliary frequency calculation range
• 0: 0 to maximum frequency.
• 1: Negative maximum frequency to maximum
frequency.

Short detection (F19.38)

Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F19.38 Phase short circuit detection action selection 0,1 [1]
Used to select whether or not to detect a short circuit between each run.
0: No detection.
1: Detection.

Input voltage selection (F19.39)

Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F19.39 Input voltage selection 0 - 2 [0]
0: 380 - 460V.
1: 260 - 460V.
2: 200 - 460V.
Note: When selecting 1, 2 function, the inverter needs to be derated, the actual output current does not exceed the
rated output current of the inverter.

Brake function (F19.24 - F19.25, F19.40 - F19.41)

Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F19.40 Flux brake PI regulator Kp 0 - 4000 [1000]
F19.41 Flux brake PI regulator Ki 0 - 500 [20]

―100― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
6.2.19 F20: Protection of Fault Parameters
Overload fault (F20.00 - F20.02)
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F20.00 Overload pre-alarm detection 00000 - 31111 [00000]
Units: Overload pre-alarm detection
• 0: It is active all the time in running status.
• 1: It is active only at constant speed.
Tens: Action selection for overload pre-alarm
• 0: The inverter doesn’t alarm and continues operation when detecting an active overload signal.
• 1: The inverter alarms and stops operation when detecting an active overload signal.
Hundreds: Overload threshold selection
• 0: Ratio of load current to the motor’s rated current (alarm: motor overload “E0019”).
• 1: Ratio of load current to the inverter’s rated current (alarm: inverter overload “E0017”).
Thousands: Motor type selection
• 0: Standard motor.
• As the cooling effect of the standard motor deteriorates at low speed, the inverter will automatically
make regulation to the motor overload protection time.
• 1: Variable frequency.
• The cooling effect of the variable frequency motor is not affected by the motor’s speed due to its
forced cooling potential, the inverter will not automatically make regulation to the motor overload
protection time, as efficient motor cooling by an external motor fan is assumed.
Ten thousands: Overload protection
• 0: Overload protection is enabled.
• 1: Overload protection is disabled.
• 2: Shielded inverter overload protection, enable motor overload protection. 6
• 3: Shielded inverter overload protection, motor overload protection.
F20.01 Overload pre-alarm detection threshold 20.0 - 200.0 [150.0%]
F20.01 defines the current threshold for overload pre-alarm protection. The setting range is a percentage
value of the motor’s or the inverter’s rated current.
F20.02 Overload pre-alarm detection time 0.0 - 60.0 [5.0s]
F20.02 defines the time during which the inverter output current exceeds overload pre-alarm detection
threshold (F20.01). If the status remains after overload pre-alarm detection time (F20.02), the inverter will
output pre-alarm signal.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―101―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.

Inverter output load-loss detection fault (F20.03 - F20.05)

Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F20.03 Inverter output load-loss detection 0 - 4 [0]
0: Disabled. It does not detect inverter output load-loss.
1: It is detecting all the time in running process, and then continues operation after detecting (alarm).
2: It detectes only at the same speed, and then continues operation after detecting (alarm).
3: It is detecting all the time in running process, and then cut off the output after detecting (fault).
4: It is detectes only at the same speed, and then cut off the output after detecting (fault).
F20.04 Inverter output load-loss detection threshold 0 - 100 [30%]
F20.04 defines the current threshold of load-loss. It is a percentage of the inverter’s rated current.
F20.05 Inverter output load-loss detection time 0.00 - 20.00 [1.00s]
If the inverter’s output current is smaller than the load-loss detection threshold (F20.04) beyond the time
defined by load-loss detection time (F20.05), the inverter will alarm inverter load-loss fault (E0018).
• F20.04 = 0 or F20.05 = 0, the inverter will not detect load loss fault.

Motor overheating fault (F20.06 - F20.07)

It can connect the electronic thermistor embedded motor stator coils to the inverter’s analogue
input in order to protect motor overheating. The connection is shown as section 8.1 HD30-EIO, on
page 115.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F20.06 Motor overheating signal input type 0 - 2 [0]
0: Does not detect the motor overheating.
1: Positive charateristic (PTC).
2: Negative charateristic (NTC).
Note: Only when using HD30-EIO will F20.06 be enabled. It need correctly set the jumpers of CN3 and CN4 to
detect the motor overheating.
F20.07 Thermistor value at motor overheating 0 - 10.0 [5.0kΩ]

Input and output phase loss fault (F20.08 - F20.11)

Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F20.08 Input phase loss detection reference 0 - 80 [30%]
F20.09 Input phase loss detection time 1.00 - 5.00 [1.00s]
F20.08 value is a percentage of the inverter’s rated voltage.
When the inverter detects certain input voltage not hit the preset detection reference (F20.08) and exceed
the preset detection time (F20.09), the inverter will perform input phase loss alarm (E0015).
• F20.08 = 0, the inverter will not detect input phase loss fault.
F20.10 Output phase loss detection reference 0 - 100 [20%]
F20.11 Output phase loss detection time 1.00 - 20.00 [3.00s]
F20.10 value is a percentage of the inverter’s rated current.
When the inverter detects certain output current not hit the preset detection reference (F20.10) and exceed
the preset detection time (F20.11), the inverter will perform output phase loss alarm (E0016).
• F20.10 = 0, the inverter will not detect output phase loss fault.

―102― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction

PID fault (F20.12 - F20.17)

Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F20.12 PID reference lose detected value 0 - 100 [0%]
F20.13 PID reference loss detection time 0.0 - 10.0 [0.20s]
F20.12 value is a percentage of the maximum reference source.
If the PID reference value is lower than the detected value (F20.12) in the detection time (F20.13), the
inverter will alarm PID reference loss alarm (E0025).
• F20.12 = 0 or F20.13 = 0, the inverter will not detect PID reference loss fault.
F20.14 PID feedback loss detected value 0 - 100 [0%]
F20.15 PID feedback loss detection time 0.0 - 10.0 [0.20s]
F20.14 value is a percentage of the maximum feedback source.
If the PID feedback value is lower than the detected value (F20.14) in the detection time (F20.15), the
inverter will implement PID feedback loss alarm (E0026).
• F20.14 = 0 or F20.15 = 0, the inverter will not detect PID feedback loss fault.
F20.16 Detection value at PID feedback out of the limit 0 - 100 [100%]
F20.17 Detection time at PID feedback out of the limit 0.00 - 10.00 [0.20s]
F20.16 value is a percentage of the maximum feedback source.
If the PID feedback value exceed the detection value (F20.16) in the detection time (F20.17), the inverter will
alarm PID feedback out of limiting (E0027).
• F20.16 = 0 or F20.17 = 0, the inverter will not detect PID feedback out of limiting fault.

Faulted auto reset function and faulted relay action (F20.18 - F20.20)
Auto reset function enables the inverter to reset the fault as per the preset F20.18 and F20.19.
During the reset interval, the inverter stops output and it will automatically restarts with flying start 6
mode.
The following faults do not have the auto reset function:
E0008: Power modular fault E0021: Control board EEPROM read/write fault
E0010: Braking unit fault E0023: Parameter setting fault
E0013: Contactor isn’t closed at power on E0024: Peripheral device fault
E0014: Current detection circuit fault
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F20.18 Auto reset times 0 - 100 [0]
F20.19 Auto reset interval 0.01 - 200.00 [5.00s/time]
When F20.19 = 0, it means “auto reset” is disabled and the protective device will be activated in case of fault.
• If no other fault is detected within 5 minutes, the auto reset times will be automatically cleared.
• On condition of external fault reset, auto reset time will be cleared.
F20.20 Faulted relay action selection 00 - 11 [00]
Units: In auto reset process Tens: In the undervoltage process
• 0: Faulted relay doesn’t act. • 0: Faulted relay doesn’t act.
• 1: Faulted relay acts. • 1: Faulted relay acts.
Note: It need preset the relay function as No. 31 function.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―103―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.

Fault history (F20.21 - F20.37)

Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F20.21 Type of fifth latest (the last) fault [Actual value]
F20.22 Setting frequency at the last fault
F20.23 Running frequency at the last fault
F20.24 Bus voltage at the last fault
F20.25 Output voltage at the last fault
F20.26 Output current at the last fault
F20.27 Input terminal status at the last fault
F20.28 Output terminal status at the last fault
F20.29 Interval of fifth latest fault
F20.30 Type of fourth latest fault
F20.31 Interval of fourth latest fault
F20.32 Type of third latest fault
F20.33 Interval of third latest fault
F20.34 Type of second latest fault
F20.35 Interval of second latest fault
F20.36 Type of first latest fault
F20.37 Interval of first latest fault
F20.38 Last fault interval
F20.22 - F20.29 record the inverter status parameters at the last fault.
F20.30 - F20.37 record the type and interval per time of four faults before the latest. The interval’s unit is 0.1
hour.

―104― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction
6.2.20 F21: Torque Control Parameters
Under open loop vector control, set F00.00 = 1 (torque control), the torque output can be controlled by
F21 Group torque control parameter. Torque control, if the motor output torque and load torque is not
balanced, the motor will be accelerated or decelerated operation.
In electric state, motor running speed is limited by speed limit value determined by F21.04, in power
generation state, motor running speed changes in following of the load speed changes.
The direction of the internal torque command varies with the run command direction and the torque
reference.
Running command Torque reference polarity Internal torque command direction
Positive Forward direction
Forward rotation
Negative Reverse direction
Positive Reverse direction
Reverse rotation
Negative Forward direction

Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]

F21.00 Torque command given channel selection 0 - 3 [0]
0: F21.01 digital set. 2: Terminals pulse set.
1: Analogue set. 3: SCI communicaiton set.
F21.01 Torque command digital setting -100.0 - 100.0 (F21.02) [0.0%]
Definite torque given value when F21.00 = 0.
F21.02 Max. Torque setting 0.0 - 500.0 (F08.04) [100.0%]
Definite allowable max. torque of output.
F21.03 Filter time of torque command 0.000 - 1.000 [0.000s] 6
Defines the time through which the external torque command passes through a delay filter through the
torque reference channel.
• Set the appropriate filter time to prevent motor jitter due to mutations in the torque command.
F21.04 Speed limit selection in torque control 0 - 2 [1]
0: Defined by F21.05, F21.06.
1: Defined by F00.06 (max. output frequency).
2: Limited by analog quantity. When the AI terminal (F16.01 - F16.04) is set to function No. 15, the speed is
limited by analog.
F21.05 Positive speed limit selection in torque control 0 - 100 (F00.06) [100%]
F21.06 Reverse speed limit selection in torque control 0 - 100 (F00.06) [100%]
Definite speed limit value of positive and reverse running under torque control mode (F00.00 = 1).
F21.10 Stop mode selection of torque control 0 - 2 [0]
0: Deceleration stop + DC braking.
• When the inverter receives the stop command, the output frequency starts from the set Dec. time
when the stop command is valid. When the frequency set in F02.16 is reached, the DC braking is
started. Stop DC braking function see F02.16 - F02.18.
1: Stop torque output.
• The inverter stops the torque output after receiving the stop command, and the motor is completely
dragged by the load.
2: Free stop.
• When the inverter receives the stop command, the inverter terminates the output immediately and the
load stops at the mechanical inertia.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―105―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
6.2.21 F23: PWM Control Parameters
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
F23.00 Set the carrier frequency 1 - 16kHz [Dependent on HD30]
F23.00 defines the carrier frequency of PWM output wave.
Inverter power Setting range Factory setting
0.2 - 22kW 1k - 8kHz 8kHz
30kW - 45kW 1k - 6kHz 6kHz
45kW 1k - 6kHz 4kHz
55kW and above 1k - 4kHz 2kHz

• The carrier frequency will affect the operating noise of the motor. The higher the carrier frequency, the
lower the noise made by the motor. Please properly set the carrier frequency.
• When the value is higher than the factory setting, the inverter should be derated by 5% when per 1kHz is
increased compared to the factory setting.
F23.01 Carrier frequency is automatically adjusted 0 - 2 [1]
0: The carrier frequency is disabled automatically.
1: Carrier frequency auto adjustment 1.
2: Carrier frequency automatic adjustment 2.
• When the carrier frequency is automatically adjusted, the inverter automatically adjusts the carrier
frequency according to the output frequency and the radiator temperature.
• Invalid carrier frequency auto adjustment during torque control.
F23.02 PWM overshoot enable 0,1 [1]
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
F23.03 PWM modulation mode 0 - 2 [0]
0: Two-phase modulation or three-phase modulation.
1: Three-phase modulation.
2: Two-phase modulation.
F23.04 PWM Modulation mode switching point1 0.00 - 50.00Hz
F23.05 PWM Modulation mode switching point2 [Dependent on HD30]
PWM modulation mode switching only applies to working conditions of V/f control and carrier frequency >
3kHz; open loop vector or carrier frequency ≤ 3kHz, the inverter automatically selects the three-phase
modulation.
• F23.04 sets the switching frequency of two-phase modulation → three-phase modulation.
• 2.2kW and below models (380V and 220V) factory value 10.00Hz, the lower limit of 10.00Hz.
• Other models, factory default 5.00Hz, lower limit 5.00Hz.
• F23.05 sets the switching frequency of three-phase modulation → two-phase modulation.
• 2.2kW and below models (380V and 220V) factory value 15.00Hz.
• Other models, factory value 10.00Hz.
Note: F23.04 setting value is F23.05 - 2.00Hz, F23.05 lower limit is F23.04 + 2.00Hz.
F23.09 Random carrier frequency coefficient K1 0 - 2000 [2]
F23.10 Random carrier frequency coefficient K2 0 - 2000 [3]

―106― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 6 Function Introduction

6.3 Group U: User Menu Mode Display Parameters

Refer to Appendix A about the record.
The concrete use is illustrated as the following example:
If you want to map F00.13 (starting frequency digital setting) to the user menu map 1 (U00.00), you
only need to set U00.00 as 00.13 (corresponding to F00.13) and then you can directly control F00.13 via
read-write U00.01 (setting value of map 1), which is the same effect as the direct operation of F00.13.
Ref. Code Function Description Setting Range [Default]
U00.00 User menu map of setting 1 00.00 - 23.05, 99.99 [00.01]
U00.02 User menu map of setting 2 00.00 - 23.05, 99.99 [00.06]
U00.04 User menu map of setting 3 00.00 - 23.05, 99.99 [00.08]
U00.06 User menu map of setting 4 00.00 - 23.05, 99.99 [00.13]
U00.08 User menu map of setting 5 00.00 - 23.05, 99.99 [00.10]
U00.10 User menu map of setting 6 00.00 - 23.05, 99.99 [00.11]
U00.12 User menu map of setting 7 00.00 - 23.05, 99.99 [02.13]
U00.14 User menu map of setting 8 00.00 - 23.05, 99.99 [03.01]
U00.16 User menu map of setting 9 00.00 - 23.05, 99.99 [03.02]
U00.18 User menu map of setting 10 00.00 - 23.05, 99.99 [08.00]
U00.20 User menu map of setting 11 00.00 - 23.05, 99.99 [08.01]
U00.22 User menu map of setting 12 00.00 - 23.05, 99.99 [08.02]
U00.24 User menu map of setting 13 00.00 - 23.05, 99.99 [08.03]
U00.26 User menu map of setting 14 00.00 - 23.05, 99.99 [08.04]
U00.28 User menu map of setting 15 00.00 - 23.05, 99.99 [99.99]
U00.30 User menu map of setting 16 00.00 - 23.05, 99.99 [99.99] 6
If set as 99.99, there is no parameter map function.
U00.01 The setting value of map 1 The same as the selected
U00.03 The setting value of map 2 parameter[0]
U00.05 The setting value of map 3
U00.07 The setting value of map 4
U00.09 The setting value of map 5
U00.11 The setting value of map 6
U00.13 The setting value of map 7
U00.15 The setting value of map 8
U00.17 The setting value of map 9
U00.19 The setting value of map 10
U00.21 The setting value of map 11
U00.23 The setting value of map 12
U00.25 The setting value of map 13
U00.27 The setting value of map 14
U00.29 The setting value of map 15
U00.31 The setting value of map 16

6.4 Group y: Manufacturer Function Parameters

The Group y is the manufacturer parameters Group for debugging at the factory before delivery.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―107―

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

7.1 Troubleshooting
HD30 series inverter has inbuilt protective and warning self-diagnostic functions. If a fault occurs, the
fault code will be displayed on the keypad. At the same time, fault relay acts, accordingly the inverter
stops output and the motor coasts to stop.
When fault or alarm occurs, please record the fault details and take proper actions according to the
below Table 7-1. If you need some technical help, please contact to the suppliers or directly call
Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
After the fault is eliminated, please reset the inverter by any of the following methods:
1. Display panel.
2. External reset terminal (multi-function terminal set as No. 46 function).
3. Communication.
4. Switching on the inverter after switching off.
Table 7-1 Fault alarm description and counter-measures
Fault Reasons of fault Counter-measures
• At the begining of powering on • It is normal status of powering on
and at the end of powering off and powering off
-Lu- DC bus undervoltage • Input voltage is too low • Please check input power voltage
• Improper wiring leads to • Please check wiring and wire the
undervoltage of hardware inverter properly
Inverter output
• Connect the inverter and motor
E0001 overcurrent (in Acc. • Improper connection between
properly
process) inverter and motor
Inverter output • Improper motor parameters
• Please set correct motor parameters 7
(F08.00 - F08.04, F13.01 - F13.05)
E0002 overcurrent (in Dec. • The rating of the used inverter is
• Select inverter with higher rating
process) too small
• Please set proper Acc. time and Dec.
Inverter output • Acc. / Dec. time is too short
time (F03.01 - F03.08)
overcurrent (in • Instant stop occurs, the running
E0003 • Please set start mode to be speed
constant speed motor is restarted
tracking (F02.00 = 2)
process)
• Please check power input
DC bus over voltage
E0004 • Input voltage is too high • Please set a proper value for Dec.
(in Acc. process)
• Deceleartion time is too short time (F03.02, F03.04, F03.06, F03.08)
• Improper wiring leads to • Please check wiring and wire the
DC bus over voltage overvoltage of hardware inverter properly
E0005
(in Dec. process) • Instant stop occurs, the running • Please set start mode to be speed
motor is restarted tracking (F02.00 = 2)
DC bus over voltage • Improper selection of the braking • Select according to the
E0006 (in constant speed devices recommended braking devices of
process) user manual

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―109―

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Fault Reasons of fault Counter-measures
• Please check power input or the
• Bus voltage is too high
function of brake
E0007 Stall overvoltage • The setting of stall overvoltage is
• Set the value of stall overvoltage
too low
properly
• Please check the connection and
connect the wire properly
• Short circuit between phases
• Please check the connection and
output
Fault of power connect the wire properly
E0008 • Short circuit to the ground
module • Please check the connection and
• Output current is too high
mechanism
• Power module is damaged
• Please contact the supplier for
repairing
• Ambient temperature is too high • Please use inverter with higher power
• Inverter external ventilation is not capacity
good • Improve the ventilation around the
E0009 Heatsink overheat
• Fan fault inverter
• Fault occurs to temperature • Replace the cooling fan
detection circuit • Please seek technical support
E0010 Fault of braking unit • Circuit fault of braking unit • Please seek technical support
• Please detect at power on after
E0011 CPU fault • CPU abnormal completely power outage
• Please seek technical support
• Please check the motor’s connection
Parameters • Input the correct motor parameters
E0012 • Parameter auto-tuning is time out
auto-tuning fault (F08.00 - F08.04, F13.01 - F13.05)
• Please seek technical support
Contactor is not • Contactor fault • Replace the contactor
E0013
actuated • Fault of control circuit • Please seek technical support
Fault of current • Current detection circuit is • Please contact the supplier for
E0014
detection circuit damaged repairing
• For three-phase input inverter, input • Please check the three-phase power
E0015 Fault of input phase phase loss fault occurs to power input
input • Please seek technical support
• Output phase disconnection or loss • Please check the connection between
Fault of output
E0016 • Heavy imbalance of inverter’s inverter and motor
phase
three-phase load • Please check the quality of motor
• Adjust Acc. time (F03.01, F03.03,
• Acc. time is too short F03.05, F03.07)
• Improper setting of V/f curve or • Adjust V/f curve (F09.00 - F09.06) or
torque boost leads to over current torque boost (F09.07, F09.08)
E0017 Inverter overload • Instant power-off occurs, the • Please set start mode to be speed
running motor is restarted tracking (F02.00 = 2)
• Mains supply voltage is too low • Please check mains supply voltage
• Motor load is too high • Please use inverter with proper power
rating

―110― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Fault Reasons of fault Counter-measures
• Please check load and mechanical
• Load disappeared or comes down
Inverter output is transmission devices
E0018 suddenly
unloaded • Please set the parmeters properly
• Parameters are not set properly
(F20.03 - F20.05)
• Adjust the setting of V/f curve (F09.00 -
• Improper setting of V/f curve F09.06)
• Mains supply voltage is too low • Check the power input
• Normal motor runs for a long time • Please use special motor if the motor
with heavy load at low speed needs to operate for a long time with
E0019 Motor overload
• Motor’s overload protection factor heavy load
is not set properly • Please properly set the overload
• Motor runs with blocked torque or protection factor of the motor
load is too heavy • Please check the load and mechanical
transmission devices
• Reduce the load; Repaire or replace
• Motor overheat the motor; Increase the Acc. / Dec.
E0020 Motor overheat • The setting of motor paramteters is time (F03.01 - F03.08)
incorrect • Set the motor parameter (F08.00 -
F08.04, F13.01 - F13.05)
Access fault of
• Memory circuit fault of control • Please contact the supplier for
E0021 Control board
board EEPROM repairing
EEPROM
• Replace the keypad
Access fault of • Memory circuit fault of keypad
E0022 • Please contact the supplier for
keypad EEPROM EEPROM
repairing
• Select an inverter with suitable power
• The power rating between motor
rating
Fault setting of and inverter is too different
E0023 • Please set correct value of motor
parameters • Improper setting of motor
parameters
parameters (F08.00 - F08.04, F13.01 - 7
F13.05)
Fault of external • Fault terminal of external
E0024 • Please check external equipment
equipment equipment operates
• Analogue reference signal is smaller
• Please check the connection
E0025 PID reference loss than F20.12
• Please seek technical support
• Analogue input circuit fault
• Analogue setting signal is smaller
• Please check the connection
E0026 PID feedback loss than F20.14
• Please seek technical support
• Analogue input circuit fault
• Analogue setting signal is bigger
PID feedback out of • Please check the connection
E0027 than F20.16
limiting • Please seek technical support
• Analogue input circuit fault
• Connection fault of Communication
SCI communication cable
E0028 • Please check the connection
time-out • Disconnected or not well
connected

Note: E0022 not affact normal running.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―111―

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Fault Reasons of fault Counter-measures
• Please check the connection
• Connection fault of Communication • Please check the connection
cable • Please correctly set the
SCI communication
E0029 • Disconnected or not well connected communication format (F17.00) and
error
• Communication setting error the baud rate (F17.01)
• Communication data error • Send the data according to MODBUS
protocol

7.2 Maintenance
Factors such as ambient temperature, humidity, PH, dust, oscillation, internal component aging, wear
and tear will give rise to the occurrence of potential faults. Therefore, it is necessary to conduct daily
maintenance to the controller.
• If HD30 has been transported for a long distance, check whether the components of HD30 are
complete and the screws are well tightened.
• Periodically clean the dust inside HD30 and check whether the screws are loose.

Danger
• Only a trained and qualified professional person can maintain the controller.
• Maintenance personnel should take off all metal jewellery before carrying out maintenance or internal
measurements in the controller. Suitable clothes and tools must be used.
• High voltage exists when the controller is powered up or running.
• Checking and maintaining can only be done after AC power of HD30 is cut off and wait for at least 10 minutes. The
cover maintenance can only be done after ensured that the charge indicator inside HD30 and the indicators on
the keypad are off and the voltage between power terminals (+) and (-) is below 36V.

Warning
• For HD30 with more than 2 years storage, please use voltage regulator to increase the input voltage gradually.
• Do not leave metal parts like screws or pads inside HD30.
• Do not make modification on the inside of controller without instruction from the supplier.
• There are IC components inside the controller, which are sensitive to stationary electricity. Directly touch the
components on the PCB board is forbidden.

―112― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Daily Maintenance
HD30 must be operated in the specified environment (refer to section 3.2, page 11). Besides, some
unexpected accidents may occur during running.
Therefore maintain it according to the Table 7-2. To prolong the lifetime of HD30, keep good running
environment, record the daily run data and detect any abnormal behavior.
Table 7-2 Daily checking items
Items Content Criteria
-10 - +40℃, derating at 40 - 50℃
Temperature and humidity
Running Less than 95%RH, non-condensing
environment Dust and water dripping No conductive dust accumulating, no water dripping
Gas No strange smell
Oscillation and heating Stable oscillation and proper temperature
HD30
Noise No abnormal sound
Heating No overheat
Motor
Noise Low and regular noise
Running status Output current Within rated range
parameters Output voltage Within rated range

Periodical Maintenance
Customer should check the inverter in short time or every 3 to 6 months according to the actual
environment so as to avoid hidden problems and make sure the inverter runs well for a long time.
General Inspection:
• Check whether the screws of control terminals are loose. If so, tighten them with a screw driver;
• Check whether the main circuit terminals are properly connected; whether the copper bar and
mains cables are overheated;
• Check whether the power cables and control cables are damaged, check especially for any wear on
7
the cable tube;
• Check whether the insulating tapes around the cable lugs are stripped, and for signs of overheating
near terminations;
• Clean the dust on PCBs and air ducts with a vacuum cleaner.
Note:
1. Dielectric strength test of the controller has already been conducted in the factory. Do not do the test
again. Otherwise, the controller might be damaged.
2. If insulation test to the motor is necessary, it should be done after the input terminals U/V/W of motor
have been detached from HD30. Otherwise, HD30 will be damaged.
3. For controllers that have been stored for a long time, they must be powered up every 2 years. When
supplying AC power to the controller, use a voltage regulator to gradually raise the input voltage to rated
input voltage at least 5 hours.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―113―

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Replacing Damaged Parts
The components that are easily damaged are: cooling fan and electrolytic capacitors of filters. Their
lifetime depends largely on their application environment and preservation. The users can decide the
time when the components should be replaced according to their service time.
Cooling fan
Life: 60,000 hours
Possible cause of damages: Wear of the bearing, aging of the fan vanes.
Criteria: After the inverter is switched off, check if the abnormal conditions such as crack existing on fan
vanes and other parts. When the inverter is switched on, check if inverter running is normal, and check
if there is any abnormal oscillation.
Electrolytic capacitors
Life: 50,000 hours
Possible cause of damages: High ambient temperature, aging of electrolyte and large pulse current
induced by rapid changing loads.
Criteria: Check if frequent overcurrent or overvoltage failures occur during inverter start-up with load.
Check if there is any leakage of liquids. Check if the safety valve protrudes. Measure the static
capacitance and insulation resistance.
Unwanted Inverter Recycling
When disposing the inverter, please pay attention to the following factors:
The capacitors may explode if they are burnt.
Poisonous gas may be generated when the plastic parts like front covers are burnt.
Disposing method: Please dispose unwanted inverters as industrial waste.

―114― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 8 Options

Chapter 8 Options
8.1 HD30-EIO
HD30 series inverters using with HD30-EIO can achieve the extension of analogue input, digital input
and relay contact output.
Terminal Description

HD30-EIO

Terminal Terminal
AI3 AI4+ DI7 DI8 DI9 R2A R3A R3B R4A
GND AI4- P24 SEL COM R2B R2C R3C R4B R4C
Figure 8-1 HD30-EIO terminal
Table 8-1 Terminal description
Terminal Description
Input voltage / current are selectable
AI3 Analogue input • Input voltage range: -10V - 10V (input impedance 32kΩ)
• Input current range: 0 - 20mA (input impedance 500Ω)

AI4+ Input voltage / current are selectable

Analogue differential
• Input voltage range: -10V - 10V (input impedance 34kΩ)
input
AI4- • Input current range: 0 - 20mA (input impedance 500Ω)
GND Analogue ground GND is isolated to COM
Programmable bipolar optional input signal 8
DI7 - DI9 Digital input
• Input voltage 0 - 30VDC (input impedance 4.7kΩ)
P24, COM Digital power supply Digital input use +24V as supply, maximum output current is 200mA
Digital input common SEL and P24 are connected by default (factory setting).
SEL
terminal • Disconnected SEL and P24 when use external power to drive DI
R2A/R2B/R2C
Programmable output, contact rating: 250VAC/3A or 30VDC/1A
R3A/R3B/R3C Relay output
• RB,RC: normally closed; RA,RC: normally open
R4A/R4B/R4C

Note:
Limit the current within 3A if the relay terminal is to connect to AC 220V voltage signal.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―115―

Chapter 8 Options Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Jumper

HD30-EIO
CN3 CN2 CN4

Figure 8-2 Jumper

Table 8-2 Jumper description
Jumper Description

3 AI3 analogue input channel can select voltage or current signal:

V
CN2 • Pin 1 & 2 are short-connected, AI3 inputs current signal.
I • Pin 2 & 3 are short-connected, AI3 inputs voltage signal (factory setting).
1
3 AI3 analogue input channel can select voltage or current signal:
V • Pin 1 & 2 are short-connected, AI3 inputs current signal.
CN3
I • Pin 2 & 3 are short-connected, AI3 inputs voltage signal (factory setting).
1 Note: Pin 2 &3 of CN4 must be short-connected.
AI4 can select thermistor.
3
V • Pin 1 & 2 are short- connected, AI4 is for the motor over-heating detection signal input
CN4 via the external connected thermistor.
R • Pin 2 & 3 are short- connected, AI4 is for the user reference analogue input (factory
1
setting).

Terminal Wiring
Digital Input Connection (DI)
DI7 - DI9 have the same connection with control board digital input terminals (DI1 - DI6), please refer
to section 4.4.4 Control Terminal Wiring.
Analogue Input Connection (AI)
AI3 with the AI2 of control terminal has same wiring, see analog input terminal of the section 4.4.4
Control Terminal Wiring, shown as Figure 4-8.
When AI4 is used as setting analogue input terminal, the connection is shown as Figure 8-3. (The AI4+
= analogue signal input)
Analogue input
AI4+ -10 - +10V/0 - 20mA

AI4-

GND
PE
Figure 8-3 AI4 connection (AI4 = analogue input terminal)

―116― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 8 Options
When AI4 is used as motor overheat detection signal input terminal, the connection is shown as Figure
8-4. The motor stator coil built-in thermistor to access the analogue input and it should correctly set
the jumper.
+5V
Jumper setting

Thermistor
10k AI4+ CN2 CN3
1 1
V V
AI4-
I R
GND 3 3
PE
Figure 8-4 AI4 connection (AI4 = overheat detection signal input)

8.2 HD30-PIO
HD30 series inverters can use plastic interface card (HD30-PIO), HD30-PIO is specific development for
injection molding machine industry, mainly provide two way isolated selectable sampling 0 - 24V
voltage, 0 - 1A current signal analogue input channels.
Terminal Description

HD30-PIO

QI1 QV1 CM1 QI2 QV2 CM2

Terminal Terminal

Figure 8-5 HD30-PIO terminal

Table 8-3 Terminal description
Terminal Description Reference function
QI1, CM1 Current input Input: 0 - 1A
Channel 1 Reference function AI3
QV1, CM1 Voltage input Input: 0 - 24V
QI2, CM2 Current input Input: 0 - 1A
8
Channel 2 Reference function AI4
QV2, CM2 Voltage input Input: 0 - 24V

Jumper

HD30-PIO

CN2 CN3

Figure 8-6 Jumper

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―117―

Chapter 8 Options Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Table 8-4 Jumper description
Jumper Description
1
V Analogue input channel 1:
CN2 • Pin 1 & 2 are short- connected, channel 1 inputs voltage signal (factory setting).
I • Pin 2 & 3 are short- connected, channel 1 inputs current signal.
3
1
V Analogue input channel 2:
CN3 • Pin 1 & 2 are short- connected, channel 1 inputs voltage signal (factory setting).
I • Pin 2 & 3 are short- connected, channel 1 inputs current signal.
3

8.3 Keypad Installation Assembly

The keypad installation assembly includes mounting base and extension cable.
Mounting Base
The keypad mounting base is an accessory. If needed, please order goods.
Model: HD-KMB. The mounting base and its size are shown as Figure 8-7, the unit is mm.
44.8
86 Door cabinet
76.5±0.2
1.8

134.5±0.2
142

HD-KMB size Mounting aperture size Installation

Figure 8-7 Mounting base and its size

Extension Cable
The keypad extension cable is an accessory. If needed, please order goods.
The models are as follows:
• 1m extension cable to keypad: HD-CAB-1M
• 2m extension cable to keypad: HD-CAB-2M
• 3m extension cable to keypad: HD-CAB-3M
• 6m extension cable to keypad: HD-CAB-6M

8.4 Power Regenerative Unit

Please refer to “HDRU Series Power Regenerative Unit User Manual” for more details.

―118― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 8 Options

8.5 Braking Unit and Braking Resistor

The braking unit has 2 models: HDBU-4T150 (the maximum braking current is 150A) and HDBU-4T250
(the maximum braking current is 250A). If needed, please order goods. Refer to the “HDBU Series
Dynamic Braking Unit User Manual” for more details.
The braking unit and braking resistor selection is shown as Table 8-5.
The connection of braking unit and the braking resistor is shown as section 4.3.2 of Power Terminal
Wiring (page 21).
Table 8-5 The braking unit and braking resistor selection
Braking resistor
Motor Lift load Non-lift load
Model Braking unit
(kW) Min. Min. Min.
Resistance
Resistance power power
Single/three phase: 200 - 240V, 50/60Hz
HD30-2D0P4G 0.4 kW Built-in 100 Ω 150 W 200 - 300 Ω 50 W
HD30-2D0P7G 0.75 kW Built-in 80 Ω 300 W 150 - 250 Ω 100 W
HD30-2D1P5G 1.5 kW Built-in 60 Ω 600 W 100 - 150 Ω 200 W
HD30-2D2P2G 2.2 kW Built-in 40 Ω 750 W 80 - 100 Ω 250 W
HD30-2D3P7G 3.7 kW Built-in 30 Ω 1.2 kW 60 - 80 Ω 400 W
HD30-2D5P5G 5.5 kW Built-in 25 Ω 1.8 kW 40 - 50 Ω 600 W
HD30-2D7P5G 7.5 kW Built-in 15 Ω 2.4 kW 30 - 40 Ω 800 W
HD30-2D011G 11 kW Build-in selection 12 Ω 3.6 kW 20 - 25 Ω 1.2 kW
HD30-2D015G 15 kW Build-in selection 10 Ω 4.5 kW 15 - 20 Ω 1.5 kW
Three phase: 200 - 240V, 50/60Hz
HD30-2T018G 18.5 kW Build-in selection 8Ω 6 kW 10 - 15 Ω 2 kW
HD30-2T022G 22 kW Build-in selection 7Ω 7.5 kW 10 - 15 Ω 2.5 kW
HD30-2T030G 30 kW Build-in selection 6Ω 9 kW 8 - 10 Ω 3 kW
HD30-2T037G 37 kW Build-in selection 5Ω 12 kW 6-8Ω 4 kW
HD30-2T045G 45 kW HDBU-4T150 4Ω 13.5 kW 4-6Ω 4.5 kW 8
HD30-2T055G 55 kW HDBU-4T150 4Ω 16.5 kW 4-6Ω 5.5 kW
HD30-2T075G 75 kW HDBU-4T250 4Ω 22.5 kW 4-6Ω 7.5 kW
Three phase: 380 - 460V, 50/60Hz
HD30-4T0P7G 0.75 kW Built-in 150 Ω 300 W 250 - 350 Ω 100 W
HD30-4T1P5G 1.5 kW Built-in 120 Ω 600 W 200 - 300 Ω 200 W
HD30-4T2P2G 2.2 kW Built-in 100 Ω 750 W 150 - 250 Ω 250 W
HD30-4T3P7G/5P5P 3.7/5.5 kW Built-in 80 Ω 1.2 kW 100 - 150 Ω 400 W
HD30-4T5P5G/7P5P 5.5/7.5 kW Built-in 60 Ω 1.8 kW 80 - 100 Ω 600 W
HD30-4T7P5G/011P 7.5/11 kW Built-in 45 Ω 2.4 kW 60 - 80 Ω 800 W
HD30-4T011G/015P 11/15 kW Built-in 40 Ω 3.6 kW 40 - 50 Ω 1.2 kW
HD30-4T015G/018P 15/18.5 kW Built-in 25 Ω 4.5 kW 30 - 40 Ω 1.5 kW
HD30-4T018G/022P 18.5/22 kW Built-in 20 Ω 6 kW 25 - 30 Ω 2 kW
HD30-4T022G/030P 22/30 kW Build-in selection 18 Ω 7.5 kW 20 - 25 Ω 2.5 kW

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―119―

Chapter 8 Options Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Braking resistor
Motor Lift load Non-lift load
Model Braking unit
(kW) Min. Min. Min.
Resistance
Resistance power power
HD30-4T030G/037P 30/37 kW Build-in selection 15 Ω 9 kW 15 - 20 Ω 3 kW
HD30-4T037G/045P 37/45 kW Build-in selection 12 Ω 12 kW 15 - 20 Ω 4 kW
HD30-4T045G/055P 45/55 kW Build-in selection 10 Ω 13.5 kW 10 - 15 Ω 4.5 kW
HD30-4T055G/075P 55/75 kW Build-in selection 9Ω 16.5 kW 10 - 15 Ω 5.5 kW
HD30-4T075G/090P 75/90 kW HDBU-4T150 6Ω 22.5 kW 8 - 10 Ω 7.5 kW
HD30-4T090G/110P 90/110 kW HDBU-4T150 6Ω 27 kW 8 - 10 Ω 9 kW
HD30-4T110G/132P 110/132 kW HDBU-4T150 6Ω 33 kW 6-8Ω 11 kW
HD30-4T132G/160P
132/160 kW HDBU-4T250 4Ω 40 kW 6-8Ω 13.2 kW
HD30-4T132G/160P-C
HD30-4T160G/200P
160/200 kW HDBU-4T250 4Ω 48 kW 4-6Ω 16 kW
HD30-4T160G/200P-C
HD30-4T200G/220P
200/220 kW HDBU-4T250 4Ω 60 kW 4-6Ω 20 kW
HD30-4T200G/220P-C
HD30-4T220G/250P
220/250 kW HDBU-4T250 *2 4 Ω *2 33kW*2 6 - 8 Ω *2 11kW *2
HD30-4T220G/250P-C
HD30-4T250G/280P
250/280 kW HDBU-4T250 *2 4 Ω *2 37.5kW*2 6 - 8 Ω *2 12.5kW *2
HD30-4T250G/280P-C
HD30-4T280G/315P
280/315 kW HDBU-4T250 *2 4 Ω *2 42kW*2 4 - 6 Ω *2 14kW *2
HD30-4T280G/315P-C
HD30-4T315G/355P
315/355 kW HDBU-4T250 *2 4 Ω *2 48kW*2 4 - 6 Ω *2 16kW *2
HD30-4T315G/355P-C
HD30-4T355G/400P
355/400 kW HDBU-4T250 *3 4 Ω *3 33kW*3 4 - 6 Ω *3 11kW *3
HD30-4T355G/400P-C
HD30-4T400G/450P
400/450 kW HDBU-4T250 *3 4 Ω *3 42kW*3 4 - 6 Ω *3 14kW *3
HD30-4T400G/450P-C
Note: *2 or *3 is meaning 2 or 3 parallel way.

Note:
1. Please select braking resistor based on the above table.
Bigger resistor can protect the braking system in fault condition, but oversized resistor may bring a
capacity decrease, lead to over voltage protection.
2. The braking resistor should be mounted in a ventilated metal housing to prevent inadevertent contact
during it works, for the temperature is high.

―120― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Chapter 8 Options

8.6 Reactor Selection

The reactor selections are shown as Table 8-6 and Table 8-7.
Table 8-6 AC reactor selection
AC input reactor AC output reactor
Model Parameter Parameter
Model Model
(mH-A) (mH-A)
HD30-4T037G/045P HD-AIL-4T037 0.19/75 HD-AOL-4T037 0.08/80
HD30-4T045G/055P HD-AIL-4T045 0.16/90 HD-AOL-4T045 0.06/100
HD30-4T055G/075P HD-AIL-4T055 0.13/115 HD-AOL-4T055 0.04/125
HD30-4T075G/090P HD-AIL-4T075 0.093/150 HD-AOL-4T075 0.035/160
HD30-4T090G/110P HD-AIL-4T090 0.08/180 HD-AOL-4T090 0.03/200
HD30-4T110G/132P HD-AIL-4T110 0.067/210 HD-AOL-4T110 0.02/225
HD30-4T132G/160P
HD-AIL-4T132 0.055/255 HD-AOL-4T132 0.016/280
HD30-4T132G/160P-C
HD30-4T160G/200P
HD-AIL-4T160 0.046/305 HD-AOL-4T160 0.013/320
HD30-4T160G/200P-C
HD30-4T200G/220P
HD-AIL-4T200 0.037/380 HD-AOL-4T200 0.011/400
HD30-4T200G/220P-C
HD30-4T220G/250P
HD-AIL-4T220 0.034/415 HD-AOL-4T220 0.01/450
HD30-4T220G/250P-C
HD30-4T250G/280P
HD-AIL-4T250 HD-AOL-4T250
HD30-4T250G/280P-C
0.026/530 0.009/560
HD30-4T280G/315P
HD-AIL-4T280 HD-AOL-4T280
HD30-4T280G/315P-C
HD30-4T315G/355P
HD-AIL-4T315 0.023/600 HD-AOL-4T315 0.007/630
HD30-4T315G/355P-C
HD30-4T355G/400P
HD-AIL-4T355 HD-AOL-4T355
HD30-4T355G/400P-C
0.019/760 0.006/800
HD30-4T400G/450P
HD-AIL-4T400 HD-AOL-4T400 8
HD30-4T400G/450P-C

Table 8-7 DC reactor selection

DC reactor
Model
Model Parameter (mH-A)
HD30-4T037G/045P HD-DCL-4T037 0.35/100
HD30-4T045G/055P HD-DCL-4T045 0.29/120
HD30-4T055G/075P HD-DCL-4T055 0.23/150
HD30-4T075G/090P HD-DCL-4T075 0.17/200
HD30-4T090G/110P HD-DCL-4T090 0.14/240
HD30-4T110G/132P HD-DCL-4T110 0.12/290
HD30-4T132G/160P
HD-DCL-4T132 0.11/330
HD30-4T132G/160P-C

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―121―

Chapter 8 Options Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
DC reactor
Model
Model Parameter (mH-A)
HD30-4T160G/200P
HD-DCL-4T160 0.09/400
HD30-4T160G/200P-C
HD30-4T200G/220P
HD-DCL-4T200 0.07/500
HD30-4T200G/220P-C
HD30-4T220G/250P
HD-DCL-4T220 0.06/550
HD30-4T220G/250P-C
HD30-4T250G/280P
HD-DCL-4T250
HD30-4T250G/280P-C
0.05/700
HD30-4T280G/315P
HD-DCL-4T280
HD30-4T280G/315P-C
HD30-4T315G/355P
build-in -
HD30-4T315G/355P-C
HD30-4T355G/400P
build-in -
HD30-4T355G/400P-C
HD30-4T400G/450P
build-in -
HD30-4T400G/450P-C

―122― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix A Quick Start for User Menu of Group U

Appendix A Quick Start for User Menu of Group U

User menu of Group U
Map the applied parameters to the U Group, only the U Group needs to be operated, you can achieve
direct read and write the parameters.
When the function parameters are used less, but the position in the function menu is scattered, you
can map the used function parameters to the U Group. This avoids the frequent switching of functional
parameters, but also in accordance with their own habits to arrange the menu order, easy to remember
and operate.
Note:
1. You must modify the U Group by setting the tens of the parameter F01.01 to 0 (do not lock the mapping
relationship between U Group and F Group).
2. The factory default is 1 (lock the mapping relationship of U Group and F Group parameters).
3. You can use M button to quickly switch to the U Group menu by setting the function code F00.12 = 3.

Example for use

If you want to map F00.13 to the user menu map 1 (U00.00) and F03.01 to the user menu map 2
(U00.02), you only need to set U00.00 and U00.02 but do not set the mapping setting value (U00.01
and U00.03), as following table.
Which, two digits of setting value before the decimal point represent the functional Group number of
Group F, and the other two digits after the decimal point represent the interGroup number.
Ref. Code Function Setting Range

U00.00 User menu map of setting 1 00.13 00.00 - 23.03, 99.99 [Factory setting]
If set as 99.99, there is no parameter map
U00.02 User menu map of setting 2 03.01 function
U00.01 The setting value of map 1 Without setting
U00.03 The setting value of map 2 Without setting

After finish setting, modifying the setting value of map (U00.01 and U00.03) can change value of
F00.13 and F03.01 automatically.
Factory setting
The user menu Group U can set up to 16 parameters, of which there are 14 parameters have been set. A
Ref. Code Setting Ref. Code Setting
U00.00 00.01 (control mode selection) U00.14 03.01 (Acc. time 1)
U00.02 00.06 (inverter maximum output frequency) U00.16 03.02 (Dec. time 1)
U00.04 00.08 (upper limit of operation frequency) U00.18 08.00 (motor rated power)
U00.06 00.13 (starting frequency digital setting) U00.20 08.01 (motor rated voltage)
U00.08 00.10 (frequency setting sources selection) U00.22 08.02 (motor rated current)
U00.10 00.11 (command setting source selection) U00.24 08.03 (motor rated frequency)
U00.12 02.13 (stop mode selection) U00.26 08.04 (motor rated RPM)

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―123―

Appendix B Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.

Appendix B Parameters
Attributes are changed:
”*”: It denotes that the value of this parameter is the actual value which cannot be modified.
“×”: It denotes that the setting of this parameter cannot be modified when the inverter is in run status.
”○”: It denotes that the setting of this parameter can be modified when the inverter is in run status.
“-”: The same as the mapping functional parameter.
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
d00: Status Display Parameters (refer to pages 44 - 47)
d00.00 Series of the inverter 0x10 - 0x50 *
Software version of the
d00.01 00.00 - 99.99 *
control board
Special software version of
d00.03 00.00 - 99.99 *
the control board
Software version of the
d00.05 00.00 - 99.99 *
keypad
d00.06 Custom series No. 0 - 9999 *
Units: Display the current
driving motor
0: Motor 1
1: Motor 2
d00.07 Motor and control mode *

Tens: Control mode

0: V/f control without PG
2: Vector control without PG
5.5kW or below type: 0.01A
d00.08 Rated current of the inverter *
7.5kW or above type: 0.1A
Units:
Bit0: Inverter fault
Bit1: Run / stop
Bit2: Forward / reverse
Bit3: Zero speed running

Tens:
Bit1&Bit0: Acc. / Dec. / constant
Bit3: DC braking (including start
d00.10 Inverter status and stop DC braking) *

Hundreds:
Bit0: Parameter auto-tuning
Bit2: Speed limiting value
Bit3: Control mode

Thousands:
Bit0: Stall overvoltage
Bit1: Current limiting

―124― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix B Parameters
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
Master setting frequency
d00.11 0 - 13 *
source
d00.12 Master setting frequency 0.01 - 400.00Hz *
d00.13 Auxiliary setting frequency 0.01 - 400.00Hz *
d00.14 Setting frequency 0.01 - 400.00Hz *
Reference frequency (after
d00.15 0.01 - 400.00Hz *
Acc. / Dec.)
d00.16 Output frequency 0.01 - 400.00Hz *
d00.17 Setting speed 0 - 60000rpm *
d00.18 Running speed 0 - 60000rpm *
d00.20 Output voltage 0 - 999V *
d00.21 Output current Actual value, unit is 0.1A *
-250.0 - 250.0% (motor rated
d00.22 Torque given *
torque)
d00.23 Output torque 0 - 300.0% (motor rated torque) *
d00.24 Output power Actual value, unit is 0.1kW *
d00.25 DC bus voltage 0 - 999V *
Potentiometer input voltage
d00.26 0.00 - 5.00V *
of the keypad
d00.27 AI1 input voltage 0.00 - 10.00V *
AI1 input voltage (after
d00.28 0.00 - 10.00V *
disposal)
d00.29 AI2 input voltage -10.00 - 10.00V *
AI2 input voltage (after
d00.30 -10.00 - 10.00V *
disposal)
d00.31 AI3 input voltage -10.00 - 10.00V *
AI3 input voltage (after
d00.32 -10.00 - 10.00V *
disposal)
d00.33 AI4 input voltage -10.00 - 10.00V *
AI4 input voltage (after
d00.34 -10.00 - 10.00V *
disposal)
DI6 terminal pulse input
d00.35 0 - 50000Hz *
frequency
d00.36 AO1 output 0.00 - 10.00V *
d00.37 AO2 output 0.00 - 10.00V *
High-speed output pulse
d00.38
frequency
0 - 50000Hz * B
d00.39 Heatsink temperature 0.0 - 999.9℃ *
d00.40 Setting line speed 0 - max output line speed *
d00.41 Reference line speed 0 - max output line speed *
d00.44 Process PID reference -100.0 - 100.0% *
d00.45 Process PID feedback -100.0 - 100.0% *
d00.46 Process PID tolerance -100.0 - 100.0% *

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―125―

Appendix B Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
d00.47 Process PID integral item -100.0 - 100.0% *
d00.48 Process PID output -100.0 - 100.0% *
d00.49 External counting value 0 - 9999 *
Bit0 - Bit8 corresponding to DI1
- DI9
0: Input terminal disconnect
with common terminal
d00.50 Input terminal status 1: Input terminal connect with *
common terminal

Only using HD30-EIO can the DI7

- DI9 be enabled
Bit0 - Bit1 corresponding to DO1
- DO2
Bit2 - Bit5 corresponding to
RLY1 - RLY4
0: Output terminal disconnect
d00.51 Output terminal status with common terminal *
1: Output terminal connect with
common terminal

Only using HD30-EIO can the

RLY2 - RLY4 be enabled
0: Normal
1: Communication timeout
MODBUS communication
d00.52 2: Incorrect data frame head *
status
3: Incorrect data frame checking
4: Incorrect data frame content
d00.53 Actual length 0 - 65535m *
d00.54 Total length 0 - 65535km *
d00.55 Total time at power-on 0 - 65535h *
d00.56 Total time at operation 0 - 65535h *
High bit of motor total energy
d00.57 0 - 65535k kW.h *
consumption
Low bit of motor total energy
d00.58 0.0 - 999.9kW.h *
consumption
High bit of energy con. at this
d00.59 0 - 65535k kW.h *
time running
Low bit of energy con. at this
d00.60 0.0 - 999.9kW.h *
time running
1 - 100
d00.61 Present fault *
100: Means undervoltage
F00: Basic Parameter (refer to pages 47 - 50)
0: Speed control
F00.00 Control mode selection 0 1 ×
1: Torque control
F00.01 Motor 1 control mode 0: V/f control without PG 0 1 ×

―126― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix B Parameters
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
selection 2: Vector control without PG
0: G type
F00.02 Inverter type setting 0 1 ×
1: P type
0: Motor 1
F00.03 Motor selection 0 1 ×
1: Motor 2
0: Option is invalid
HD30 general extension
F00.04 1: HD30-EIO is valid 0 1 ×
option selection
3: HD30-PIO is valid
Inverter max. output
F00.06 50.00 - 400.00Hz 50.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
frequency
0: Digital setting (F00.08)
1: Analogue input AI setting
Upper limit of operation 2: Terminal pulse setting
F00.07 0 1 ×
frequency setting source 3 - 6: AI1 - AI4 set
7: Keypad potentiometer
setting
Upper limit of operation
F00.08 0.00 - F00.06 50.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
frequency
Lower limit of operation
F00.09 0.00 - upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
frequency
0: Display panel digital setting
1: Terminal digital setting
2: SCI communication setting
Frequency setting sources 3: AI analogue setting
F00.10 0 1 ○
selection 4: Terminal pulse setting
6 - 9: AI1 - AI4 set
10: Keypad potentiometer
setting
0: Display panel running source
Command setting source 1: Terminal running source
F00.11 0 1 ×
selection 2: SCI communication running
source
0: Switch the keypad running
direction
Function selection of the 1: Switch local and remote
F00.12 2 1 ○
multi-function key control
2: Multi-function key is invalid
3: U group shortcut menu
Starting frequency digital
B
F00.13 0.00 - upper limit 50.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
setting
Units: Frequency setting save
selection at power outage
0: Not stored when power down
F00.14 Frequency setting control 1: Storage when power down 1001 1 ○

Tens: Frequency setting control

selection at stop

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―127―

Appendix B Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
0: Set frequency at stop
1: Set the frequency to F00.13
when stopping

Hundreds: Communication
setting frequency storage
selection
0: Not stored when power down
1: Storage when power down

Thousands: Switch the

frequency channel to the
analogue selection
0: Not saved
1: Save
Jog operation frequency
F00.15 0.00 - upper limit 5.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
digital setting 1
F00.16 Interval of jog operation 0.0 - 100.0s 0.0s 0.1s ×
0: The same as run command
F00.17 Operation direction selection 0 1 ×
1: Opposite to run command
0: Reverse operation is
permitted
F00.18 Anti-reverse operation 0 1 ×
1: Reverse operation is
prohibitted

F00.19 Dead time of direction switch 0.0 - 3600.0s 0.0s 0.1s ×

0: Enabled
F00.20 Key enable of optional keypad 0 1 ○
1: Disabled
0: Disabled
F00.21 Dormant function selection 0 1 ×
1: Enabled
F00.22 Dormancy wake up time 0.0 - 6000.0s 1.0s 0.1s ○
F00.24 Sleep delay time 0.0 - 6000.0s 1.0s 0.1s ○
F00.25 Sleep frequency 0.00Hz - upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
Unit: When running is controlled
by V/f, action selection of zero
frequency
0: No treatment
1: Inverter lock output
2: Inverter run in DC brake
Action selection for inverter
F00.26 111 1 ×
running at zero frequency Ten: Zero frequency action
selection in open loop vector
running
Hundreds: Zero frequency
action selection in torque
control
0: No treatment

―128― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix B Parameters
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
1: Inverter lock output
2: Inverter run in DC brake
3: The frequency converter is
operated by pre-excitation
Unit: panel command binding
frequency source selection
Ten: Terminal command Binding
frequency source selection
Hundreds: communication
command binding frequency
source selection

0: No binding
Command source binding 1: Keypa digital setting
F00.27 ×
frequency source selection
2: Terminal digital setting
3: SCI communicaiton setting
5: Terminal pulse setting
7 - 9: AI1 - AI3 setting
A: AI4 setting
b: Keypad potentiometer
setting
C: PIDsetting
d: Multi-speed setting
0: Only valid in control of
Functions selection of button
F00.28 keypad 0 1 ○
STOP
1: Valid in all control mode
F01: Protection of Parameters ( refer to pages 50 - 53)
F01.00 User’s password 00000 - 65535 0 1 ○
Units:
0: Full menu mode
1: Checking menu mode (Only
different from factory setting
parameters can be displayed)

Tens:
0: Does not lock the parameter
mapping relationship of Group
U and Group F
F01.01 Menu mode selection 010 1 ○
1: Lock the parameter mapping
relationship of Group U and B
Group F

Hundred:
0: After password protection,
Group F and U parameters can
be read
1: After password protection,
Group F and U parameters are

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―129―

Appendix B Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
prohibited from reading
0: No operation
1: Restore to factory settings
2,3: Download the keypad
EEPROM parameter 1/2 to the
current function code settings
Function code parameter
F01.02 4: Clear fault information 0 1 ×
initialization
5.6: Download the keypad
EEPROM parameter 1/2 to the
current function code settings
(including the motor
parameters)
0: No operation
Display panel EEPROM 1,2: Upload the current function
F01.03 0 1 ○
parameter initialization code settings to the keypad
EEPROM parameter 1/2
F02: Run / Stop Control Parameters (refer to pages 53 - 56)
0: From the DWELL frequency to
start
F02.00 Start mode selection 1: Brake first and then start from 0 1 ×
DWELL frequency
2: Start after speed tracking
F02.01 Starting delay time 0.00 - 10.00s 0.00s 0.01s ×
Start DWELL frequency
F02.02 0.00 - upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
setting
Retention time of starting
F02.03 0.00 - 10.00s 0.00s 0.01s ×
DWELL frequency
0 - 100% (inverter’s rated
F02.04 DC braking current setting 50% 1% ×
current)
F02.05 DC braking time at start 0.00 - 60.00s 0.50s 0.01s ×
Faster tracking results
F02.06 0.000 – 2.000Hz 0.000Hz 0.001Hz ○
compensation value
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
F02.13 Stop mode selection 0 1 ×
2: Decelerate to stop with DC
braking
DWELL frequency setting at
F02.14 0.00 - upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
stop
Retention time of DWELL
F02.15 0.00 - 10.00s 0.00s 0.01s ×
frequency at stop
DC braking initial frequency
F02.16 0.00 - 50.00Hz 0.50Hz 0.01Hz ×
at stop
DC braking waiting time at
F02.17 0.00 - 10.00s 0.00s 0.01s ×
stop
F02.18 DC braking time at stop 0.00 - 10.00s 0.50s 0.01s ×
Units:
F02.19 Jog control mode 10 1 ×
0: The jog functions of start and

―130― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix B Parameters
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
stop mode etc are invalid
1: The jog functions of start and
stop mode etc are enabled

Tens:
0: Terminal jog is not preferred
1: Terminal jog priority
F02.20 Pre-excitatio n time 0.00 - 0.50s 0.50s 0.01s ×
F03: Acc. / Dec. Parameters (refer to pages 56 - 57)
Unit: Mode selection of Acc. and
Dec.
0: Linear Acc. or Dec.
1: S-curve Acc. or Dec.
F03.00 Acc. / Dec. mode selection 00 1 ○
Ten: Acc. / Dec. time reference
frequency adjustment
0: Maximum frequency (F00.06)
1: Set frequency
F03.01 Acc. time 1 0.1 - 6000.0s 15kW or 0.1s ○
below
F03.02 Dec. time 1 0.1 - 6000.0s 0.1s ○
models:
F03.03 Acc. time 2 0.1 - 6000.0s 10.0s 0.1s ○

F03.04 Dec. time 2 0.1 - 6000.0s 0.1s ○

18.5 - 55
F03.05 Acc. time 3 0.1 - 6000.0s kW: 30.0s 0.1s ○

F03.06 Dec. time 3 0.1 - 6000.0s 0.1s ○

other
F03.07 Acc. time 4 0.1 - 6000.0s 0.1s ○
models:
F03.08 Dec. time 4 0.1 - 6000.0s 60.0s 0.1s ○
Switching frequency of Acc.
F03.09 0.00 - upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
time 2 and time 1
Switching frequency of Dec.
F03.10 0.00 - upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
time 2 and time 1
S-curve characteristic time at
F03.11 0.00 - 2.50s 0.20s 0.01s ○
starting Acc.
S-curve characteristic time at
F03.12 0.00 - 2.50s 0.20s 0.01s ○
ending Acc.
S-curve characteristic time at
F03.13 0.00 - 2.50s 0.20s 0.01s ○
starting Dec.
S-curve characteristic time at
B
F03.14 0.00 - 2.50s 0.20s 0.01s ○
ending Dec.
F03.15 Acc. time of jog operation 0.1 - 6000.0s 6.0s 0.1s ○
F03.16 Dec. time of jog operation 0.1 - 6000.0s 6.0s 0.1s ○
F03.17 Dec. time of emergency stop 0.1 - 6000.0s 10.0s 0.1s ○
F04: Process PID Control (refer to pages 57 - 60)
F04.00 Process PID control selection 0: PID control is disabled 0 1 ×

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―131―

Appendix B Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
1: PID control is enabled
0: Digital reference
1: AI analogue reference
2: Terminal pulse reference
F04.01 Reference source selection 0 1 ×
3 - 6: AI1 - AI4 given
7: Operation panel
potentiometer given
0: AI analogue feedback
1: Terminal pulse feedback
2 - 5: AI1 - AI4 given
F04.02 Feedback source selection 0 1 ×
6: Operation panel
potentiometer given
7: Speedn closed loop feedback
F04.03 Setting digital reference -100.0 - 100.0% 0.00% 0.01% ○
F04.04 Proportional gain (P1) 0.0 - 500.0 50.0 0.1 ○
F04.05 Integral time (I1) 0.01 - 10.00s 1.00s 0.01s ○
F04.06 Integral upper limit 0.0 - 100.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
0.00 - 10.00s
F04.07 Differential time (D1) 0.00s 0.01s ○
0.00: The differential is disabled
Differential amplitude limit
F04.08 0.00 - 100.0% 20.0% 0.1% ○
value
F04.09 Sampling cycle (T) 0.01 - 50.00s 0.10s 0.01s ○
F04.10 Bias limit 0.0 - 20.0% (reference) 0.0% 0.1% ○
0: Set by F04.13
1: Set by AI analogue value
PID regulator upper limit 2: Set by terminal pulse input
F04.11 0 1 ×
source selection 3 - 6: AI1 - AI4 given
7: Keypad potentiometer
setting
0: Set by F04.14
1: Set by AI analogue value
PID regulator lower limit 2: Set by terminal pulse input
F04.12 0 1 ×
source selection 3 - 6: AI1 - AI4 given
7: Keypad potentiometer
setting
PID regulator upper limit
F04.13 0.00 - upper limit 50.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
value
F04.14 PID regulator lower limit value 0.00 - upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
0: Positive
F04.15 PID regulator characteristic 0 1 ×
1: Negative
F04.17 PID output filter time 0.01 - 10.00s 0.05s 0.01s ○
0: PID regulation disable reverse
(When PID output is negative, 0
F04.18 PID output reverse selection is the limit) 0 ×
1: PID regulation enable reverse
(When F00.18 = 1 disable

―132― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix B Parameters
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
reverse, 0 is the limit)
PID output reverse
F04.19 0.00Hz - upper limit 50.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
frequency’s upper limit
F04.20 Proportional gain (P2) 0.0 - 500.0 50.0 0.1 ○
F04.21 Integral time (I2) 0.01 - 10.00s 1.00s 0.01s ○
F04.22 Derivative time (D2) 0.00 - 10.00s 0.00s 0.01s ○
0: Do not adjust
PID parameter adjustment 1: DI
F04.23 0 1 ○
basis 2: Deviation
3: Frequency
PID parameter switching
F04.24 0.0% - F04.25 0.0% 0.1% ○
point 1
PID parameter switching
F04.25 F04.24 - 100.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
point 2
F04.27 Pulse of each turn 1 - 9999 1024 1 ×
F04.28 Max. closed loop speed 1 - 24000rpm 1500rpm 1rpm ×
0: No operation at stop
F04.29 PID arithmetic mode 0 1 ×
1: Operation at shutdown
0: No sleeping
F04.30 PID sleep 0 1 ×
1: Sleep enable
F04.31 Tolerance of waking up 0.0 - 100. 0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
F04.32 Delay of waking up 0.0 - 6000.0s 0.0s 0.1s ○
F04.33 Sleep tolerance 0.0 - 100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
F04.34 Sleep delay 0.0 - 6000.0s 0.0s 0.1s ○
F04.35 Sleep frequency 0.00Hz - max. frequency 20.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
F05: External Reference Curve Parameters (refer to pages 60 - 62)
Units: AI1 characteristic curve
selection
Tens: AI2 characteristic curve
selection
Hundreds: AI3 characteristic
curve selection
Thousands: AI4 characteristic
curve selection
External reference curve Ten thousands: Pulse input
F05.00 33333 1 ×
selection characteristic curve selection
0: Line 1
1: Line 2
B
2: Polyline
3: No treatment

Only when using HD30-EIO can

hundreds and thousands be
enabled
F05.01 Minimum reference of line 1 0.0 - F05.03 0.0% 0.1% ○

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―133―

Appendix B Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
Minimum reference
F05.02 0.0 - 100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
corresponding value of line 1
F05.03 Maximum reference of line 1 F05.01 - 100.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
Maximum reference
F05.04 0.0 - 100.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
corresponding value of line 1
F05.05 Minimum reference of line 2 0.0 - F05.07 0.0% 0.1% ○
Minimum reference
F05.06 0.0 - 100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
corresponding value of line 2
F05.07 Maximum reference of line 2 F05.05 - 100.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
Maximum reference
F05.08 0.0 - 100.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
corresponding value of line 2
Maximum reference of
F05.09 F05.11 - 100.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
polyline
Maximum reference
F05.10 corresponding value of 0.0 - 100.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
polyline
Inflection point 2 reference of
F05.11 F05.13 - F05.09 100.0% 0.1% ○
polyline
Inflection point 2
F05.12 0.0 - 100.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
corresponding value
Inflection point 1 reference of
F05.13 F05.15 - F05.11 0.0% 0.1% ○
polyline
Inflection point 1
F05.14 0.0 - 100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
corresponding value
Minimum reference of
F05.15 0.0 - F05.13 0.0% 0.1% ○
polyline
Minimum reference
F05.16 corresponding value of 0.0 - 100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
polyline
F05.17 Skip frequency 1 F00.09 - upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
F05.18 Skip frequency 2 F00.09 - upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
F05.19 Skip frequency 3 F00.09 - upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
F05.20 Range of skip frequency 0.00 - 30.00Hz 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
Jog operation frequency
F05.21 0.00 - upper limit 5.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
digital setting 2
0: Straight line 1
Operation panel 1: Straight line 2
F05.22 3 1 ×
potentiometer curve selection 2: Polyline
3: No treatment
F06: MS SPEED and Simple PLC (refer to pages 62 - 65)
Multi-step frequency
F06.00 F00.09 - upper limit 3.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 1
Multi-step frequency
F06.01 F00.09 - upper limit 6.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 2
F06.02 Multi-step frequency F00.09 - upper limit 9.00Hz 0.01Hz ○

―134― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix B Parameters
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
command 3
Multi-step frequency
F06.03 F00.09 - upper limit 12.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 4
Multi-step frequency
F06.04 F00.09 - upper limit 15.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 5
Multi-step frequency
F06.05 F00.09 - upper limit 18.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 6
Multi-step frequency
F06.06 F00.09 - upper limit 21.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 7
Multi-step frequency
F06.07 F00.09 - upper limit 24.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 8
Multi-step frequency
F06.08 F00.09 - upper limit 27.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 9
Multi-step frequency
F06.09 F00.09 - upper limit 30.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 10
Multi-step frequency
F06.10 F00.09 - upper limit 33.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 11
Multi-step frequency
F06.11 F00.09 - upper limit 36.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 12
Multi-step frequency
F06.12 F00.09 - upper limit 39.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 13
Multi-step frequency
F06.13 F00.09 - upper limit 42.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 14
Multi-step frequency
F06.14 F00.09 - upper limit 45.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 15
0: No PLC operation
F06.15 Simple PLC control selection 0 1 ×
1: Enabling PLC operation
Units: PLC operation mode
selection
0: Stop after single cycle
operation
1: Maintain the final value after
single cycle of PLC operation
2: Cycle operation

Tens: PLC operation restart

Simple PLC operation mode mode selection after pause
F06.16 0000 1 ×
selection 0: Start from step 1
1: Continue to operate from the B
step where the inverter pauses
2: Continue to operate at the
frequency when the inverter
pauses

Hundreds: Save the PLC status

after power failure
0: Not be saved

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―135―

Appendix B Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
1: Saved

Thousands: time unit selection

of the PLC step
0: Second (s)
1: Minute (m)
F06.17 Setting of PLC step 1 Units: PLC running frequency 000 1 ○
selection
F06.19 Setting of PLC step 2 000 1 ○
0: Multi- step frequency
F06.21 Setting of PLC step 3 command 000 1 ○
F06.23 Setting of PLC step 4 1: Depend on F00.10 000 1 ○
F06.25 Setting of PLC step 5 000 1 ○
Tens: Operation direction
F06.27 Setting of PLC step 6 000 1 ○
selection of PLC at different step
F06.29 Setting of PLC step 7 0: Forward 000 1 ○
F06.31 Setting of PLC step 8 1: Reverse 000 1 ○
F06.33 Setting of PLC step 9 2: Depend on run command 000 1 ○
F06.35 Setting of PLC step 10 000 1 ○
Hundreds: Acc. / Dec. time
F06.37 Setting of PLC step 11 selection of PLC at different 000 1 ○
F06.39 Setting of PLC step 12 steps 000 1 ○
0: Acc. / Dec. time 1
F06.41 Setting of PLC step 13 000 1 ○
1: Acc. / Dec. time 2
F06.43 Setting of PLC step 14 000 1 ○
2: Acc. / Dec. time 3
F06.45 Setting of PLC step 15 3: Acc. / Dec. time 4 000 1 ○
F06.18 Running time of step 1 0.0 - 3276.7 5.0 0.1 ○
F06.20 Running time of step 2 0.0 - 3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F06.22 Running time of step 3 0.0 - 3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F06.24 Running time of step 4 0.0 - 3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F06.26 Running time of step 5 0.0 - 3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F06.28 Running time of step 6 0.0 - 3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F06.30 Running time of step 7 0.0 - 3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F06.32 Running time of step 8 0.0 - 3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F06.34 Running time of step 9 0.0 - 3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F06.36 Running time of step 10 0.0 - 3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F06.38 Running time of step 11 0.0 - 3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F06.40 Running time of step 12 0.0 - 3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F06.42 Running time of step 13 0.0 - 3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F06.44 Running time of step 14 0.0 - 3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F06.46 Running time of step 15 0.0 - 3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F07: Wobble Operation Parameters (refer to pages 65 - 66)
0: Disabled
F07.00 Wobble operation selection 0 1 ×
1: Enabled

―136― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix B Parameters
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
Units: Start mode of wobble
operation
0: Auto start (according to
F07.03)
1: Manual start

Tens: Wobble operation

amplitude
0: Relative to the wobble central
frequency
1: Relative to the maximum
output frequency

F07.01 Wobble operation mode Hundreds: Restart mode of 0000 1 ×

wobble operation
0: The inverter restarts the
wobble operation as per the
recorded frequency and
direction when it stops last time
1: The inverter restarts the
wobble operation from 0Hz

Thousands: Save the wobble

operation parameters at power
outage
0: Saved
1: Not be saved
F07.02 Preset wobble frequency 0.00 - upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
Holding time of preset
F07.03 0.0 - 999.9s 0.0s 0.1s ×
wobble frequency
F07.04 Wobble amplitude 0.0 - 50.0% 0.0% 0.1% ×
F07.05 Jump frequency 0.0 - F07.04 0.0% 0.1% ×
F07.06 Wobble operation cycle 0.0 - 999.9s 10.0s 0.1s ×
F07.07 Rising time of triangle wave 0.0 - 100.0% (F07.06) 50.0% 0.1% ×
F08: Asyn. Motor 1 Parameters (refer to pages 66 - 68)
F08.00 Rated power of motor 1 0.2 - 500.0kW 0.1kW ×
F08.01 Rated voltage of motor 1 0 - inverter’s rated voltage Depend 1V ×
5.5kW above: 0.0 - 999.9A on HD30 0.1A
F08.02 Rated current of motor 1 ×
5.5kW or below: 0.00 - 99.99A 0.01A B
F08.03 Rated frequency of motor 1 1.0 - 400.0Hz 50.0Hz 0.1Hz ×
F08.04 Rated speed of motor 1 1 - 24000rpm 1500rpm 1rpm ×
Depend
F08.05 Power factor of motor 1 0.001 - 1.000 0.001 ×
on HD30
0: Auto-tuning is disabled
Parameter auto-tuning of
F08.06 1: Stationary auto-tuning 0 1 ×
motor 1
2: Rotary auto-tuning

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―137―

Appendix B Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
3: Motor stator resistance
measurement
5.5kW below: 0.00 - 99.99Ω 0.01Ω
7.5 - 75kW: 0.000 - 9.999Ω 0.001Ω
F08.07 Stator resistance of motor 1 ×
90kW and above: 0.0000 -
0.0001Ω
0.9999Ω
5.5kW below: 0.00 - 99.99Ω 0.01Ω
7.5 - 75kW: 0.000 - 9.999Ω 0.001Ω
F08.08 Rotor resistance of motor 1 ×
90kW and above: 0.0000 -
0.0001Ω
0.9999Ω
5.5kW below: 0.0 - 5000.0mH Depend 0.1mH
Leakage inductance of motor 7.5 - 75kW: 0.00 - 500.00mH on HD30 0.01mH
F08.09 ×
1 90kW and above: 0.000 - 50.000
0.001 mH
mH
5.5kW below: 0.0 - 5000.0mH 0.1mH
7.5 - 75kW: 0.00 - 500.00mH 0.01mH
F08.10 Mutual inductance of motor 1 ×
90kW and above: 0.000 - 50.000
0.001 mH
mH
Idling exciting current of 5.5kW and below: 0.0 - 999.9A 0.1A
F08.11 ×
motor 1 5.5kW above: 0.00 - 99.99A 0.01A
Motor 1 core saturation
F08.12 0.00 - 1.00 1.00 0.01 ×
coefficient 1
Motor 1 core saturation
F08.13 0.00 - 1.00 1.00 0.01 ×
coefficient 2
Motor 1 core saturation
F08.14 0.00 - 1.00 1.00 0.01 ×
coefficient 3
Motor 1 core saturation
F08.15 0.00 - 1.00 1.00 0.01 ×
coefficient 4
Motor 1 core saturation
F08.16 0.00 - 1.00 1.00 0.01 ×
coefficient 5
F09: V/f Control Parameters (refer to pages 68 - 70)
0: Line
1: Square curve
F09.00 V/f curve selection of motor 1 2: 1.2 exponential curve 0 1 ×
3: 1.7 exponential curve
4: User-defined curve
V/f frequency value F3 of
F09.01 F09.03 - 100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ×
motor 1
V/f voltage value V3 of motor
F09.02 F09.04 - 100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ×
1
V/f frequency value F2 of
F09.03 F09.05 - 100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ×
motor 1
V/f voltage value V2 of motor
F09.04 F09.06 - 100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ×
1
F09.05 V/f frequency value F1 of 0.0% - F09.03 0.0% 0.1% ×

―138― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix B Parameters
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
motor 1
V/f voltage value V1 of motor
F09.06 0.0% - F09.04 0.0% 0.1% ×
1
45kW and
below:
2.0%

55 - 132kW
0.0 - 30.0%
F09.07 Torque boost of motor 1 inverter: 0.1% ×
0.0: Auto torque boost
1.0%

160kW and
above:
0.5%
Cut-off point used for manual
F09.08 0.0 - 50.0% (F08.03) 25.0% 0.1% ○
torque boost of motor 1
Slip compensation gain of
F09.09 0.0 - 300.0% 00.0% 0.1% ○
motor 1
Slip compensation filter time
F09.10 0.01 - 10.00s 0.10s 0.01s ○
of motor 1
Slip compensation limitation
F09.11 0.0 - 250.0% 200.0% 0.1% ×
of motor 1
Compensation constant of
F09.12 0.1 - 25.0s 2.0s 0.1s ×
motor 1
0: Disabled
F09.14 AVR function of motor 1 1: Enabled all the time 1 1 ○
2: Disabled in Dec. process
Motor 1 low frequency
F09.15 0 - 200 50 1 ○
suppression shock coefficient
Motor 1 high frequency
F09.16 0 - 200 20 1 ○
suppression shock coefficient
0: Energy saving control invalid
Motor 1 energy saving control
F09.17 3: Energy saving according to 0 1 ×
select
output current
F09.18 Motor 1 energy saving factor 0.0 - 100.0% 5.0% 0.1% ○
Motor 1 energy start
F09.19 0.00 - 50.00Hz 25.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
frequency
Motor 1 energy switching
F09.20 0.0 - 100.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
point B
Motor 1 energy saving
F09.21 0 - 5000 times 10 times 1 times ○
detecting times
Motor 1 energy voltage
F09.22 40 - 4000ms 100ms 1ms ○
recovery time
Motor 1 energy voltage
F09.23 40 - 4000ms 100ms 1ms ○
decreasing time
F10: Motor 1 Vector Control Speed-loop Parameters (refer to pages 70 - 71)

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―139―

Appendix B Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
Speed control proportional
F10.00 0.1 - 200.0 10.0 0.1 ○
gain 1 of motor 1
Speed control integral time 1
F10.01 0.00 - 10.00s 0.10s 0.01s ○
of motor 1
Speed control proportional
F10.02 0.1 - 200.0 10.0 0.1 ○
gain 2 of motor 1
Speed control integral time 2
F10.03 0.00 - 10.00s 0.20s 0.01s ○
of motor 1
Speed-loop PI switching
F10.04 0.00Hz - F10.05 10.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
frequency 1 of motor 1
Speed-loop PI switching
F10.05 F10.04 - 50.00Hz 15.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
frequency 2 of motor 1
Speed-loop integral limitation 0.0 - 200.0% (motor rated
F10.06 180.0% 0.1% ○
of motor 1 current)
0.00 - 1.00s
Speed-loop differential time
F10.07 0.00: There is not the speed-loop 0.00s 0.01s ○
of motor 1
differential
0.000 - 1.000s
Speed-loop output filter time
F10.08 0.000: the speed-loop filter is 0.020s 0.001s ○
of motor 1
disabled
0: Do not lock
Motor 1 torque limit lock
F10.09 1: All of the torque limit is same 0 1 ×
selection
with FWD electric torque limit
Unit: Forward rotation electric
torque limit channel
Ten: Reverse electric torque
limit channel
Hundreds: Forward rotation
torque limit channel
Thousands: Reverse rotation
F10.10 Motor 1 Torque limit channel torque limit channel 00000 1 ×

0: Number limit
1: Analog input limit
2: Terminal pulse limit
3 - 6: AI1 - AI4 limit
7: Keypad potentiometer is
limited
Motor torque limitation when 0.0 - 200.0% (motor rated
F10.11 180.0% 0.1% ○
motor 1 is forward current)
Motor torque limitation when 0.0 - 200.0% (motor rated
F10.12 180.0% 0.1% ○
motor 1 is reverse current)
Recreated torque limitation 0.0 - 200.0% (motor rated
F10.13 180.0% 0.1% ○
when motor 1 is forward current)
Recreated torque limitation 0.0 - 200.0% (motor rated
F10.14 180.0% 0.1% ○
when motor 1 is reverse current)
F11: Motor 1 Vector Control Current Loop Parameter (refer to pages 71 -72)

―140― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix B Parameters
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
F11.00 Motor 1 current loop KP 1 - 2000 400 1 ○
F11.01 Motor 1 current loop KI 1 - 1000 200 1 ○
Motor 1 current loop output
F11.02 0 - 31 3 1 ○
filter times
Motor 1 current loop 0: Feedforward is prohibited
F11.03 0 1 ×
feedforward enabled 1: Enable feedforward
Motor 1 excitation boost
F11.04 0.0 - 30.0% 0.0% 0.1% ×
setting
Unit: Field orientation angle
correction enable
0: Field orientation correction is
forbidden
1: Enables magnetic field
orientation correction
Motor 1 field orientation
F11.05 00 1 ×
optimization setting
Ten: Mutual inductance
projections enabled
0: Disable mutual inductance
based on flux calculation
1: Enable mutual inductance
based on flux calculation
F13: Asyn. Motor 2 Parameters (refer to pages 72 -75)
Control mode selection of 0: V/f control without PG
F13.00 0 1 ×
motor 2 2: Vector control without PG
F13.01 Rated power of motor 2 0.2 - 500.0kW 0.1kW ×
F13.02 Rated voltage of motor 2 0 - 999V Depend 1V ×
5.5kW above: 0.0 - 999.9A on HD30 0.1A
F13.03 Rated current of motor 2 ×
5.5kW or below: 0.00 - 99.99A 0.01A
F13.04 Rated frequency of motor 2 1.0 - 400.0Hz 50.0Hz 0.1Hz ×
Depend
F13.05 Rated speed of motor 2 1 - 24000rpm 1rpm ×
on HD30
0: Auto-tuning is disabled
1: Stationary auto-tuning
Parameter auto-tuning of
F13.07 2: Rotary auto-tuning 0 1 ×
motor 2
3: Motor stator resistance
measurement
5.5kW below: 0.00 - 99.99Ω 0.01Ω

F13.08 Stator resistance of motor 2

7.5 - 75kW: 0.000 - 9.999Ω 0.001Ω
×
B
90kW and above: 0.0000 -
0.0001Ω
0.9999Ω
Depend
5.5kW below: 0.00 - 99.99Ω 0.01Ω
on HD30
7.5 - 75kW: 0.000 - 9.999Ω 0.001Ω
F13.09 Rotor resistance of motor 2 ×
90kW and above: 0.0000 -
0.0001Ω
0.9999Ω
F13.10 Leakage inductance of motor 5.5kW below: 0.0 - 5000.0mH 0.1mH ×

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―141―

Appendix B Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
2 7.5 - 75kW: 0.00 - 500.00mH 0.01mH
90kW and above: 0.000 - 50.000
0.001 mH
mH
5.5kW below: 0.0 - 5000.0mH 0.1mH
7.5 - 75kW: 0.00 - 500.00mH 0.01mH
F13.11 Mutual inductance of motor 2 ×
90kW and above: 0.000 - 50.000
0.001 mH
mH
Idling exciting current of 5.5kW and below: 0.0 - 999.9A 0.1A
F13.12 ×
motor 2 5.5kW above: 0.00 - 99.99A 0.01A
Motor 2 core saturation
F13.13 0.00 - 1.00 1.00 0.01 ×
coefficient 1
Motor 2 core saturation
F13.14 0.00 - 1.00 1.00 0.01 ×
coefficient 2
Motor 2 core saturation
F13.15 0.00 - 1.00 1.00 0.01 ×
coefficient 3
0: Line
1: Square curve
F13.16 V/f curve selection of motor 2 2: 1.2 exponential curve 0 1 ×
3: 1.7 exponential curve
4: User-defined curve
V/f frequency value F3 of
F13.17 F13.19 - 100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ×
motor 2
V/f voltage value V3 of motor
F13.18 F13.20 - 100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ×
2
V/f frequency value F2 of
F13.19 F13.21 - F13.17 0.0% 0.1% ×
motor 2
V/f voltage value V2 of motor
F13.20 F13.22 - F13.18 0.0% 0.1% ×
2
V/f frequency value F1 of
F13.21 0.0% - F13.19 0.0% 0.1% ×
motor 2
V/f voltage value V1 of motor
F13.22 0.0% - F13.20 0.0% 0.1% ×
2
45kW and
below:
2.0%

55 - 132
0.0 - 30.0% kW
F13.23 Torque boost of motor 2 0.1% ×
0.0: Auto torque boost inverter:
1.0%

160kW and
above:
0.5%
Cut-off point used for manual
F13.24 0.0 - 50.0% (F13.04) 30.0% 0.1% ○
torque boost of motor 2

―142― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix B Parameters
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
Slip compensation gain of
F13.25 0.0 - 300.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
motor 2
Slip compensation filter time
F13.26 0.01 - 10.00s 0.10s 0.01s ○
of motor 2
Slip compensation limitation
F13.27 0.0 - 250.0% 200.0% 0.1% ×
of motor 2
Compensation constant of Depend
F13.28 0.000 - 9.999kW 0.001kW ×
motor 2 on HD30
0: Disabled
F13.30 AVR function of motor 2 1: Enabled all the time 1 1 ○
2: Disabled in Dec. process
Motor 2 low frequency
F13.31 0 - 200 50 1 ○
suppression shock coefficient
Motor 2 high frequency
F13.32 0 - 200 20 1 ○
suppression shock coefficient
0: Energy saving control invalid
Motor 2 energy saving control
F13.33 3: Energy saving according to 0 1 ×
select
output curren
F13.34 Motor 2 energy saving factor 0.0 - 100.0% 5.0% 0.1% ○
Speed control proportional
F13.35 0.1 - 200.0 10.0 0.1 ○
gain 1 of motor 2
Speed control integral time 1
F13.36 0.00 - 10.00s 0.20s 0.01s ○
of motor 2
Speed control proportional
F13.37 0.1 - 200.0 10.0 0.1 ○
gain 2 of motor 2
Speed control integral time 2
F13.38 0.00 - 10.00s 0.20s 0.01s ○
of motor 2
Speed-loop PI switching
F13.39 0.00Hz - F13.40 10.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
frequency 1 of motor 2
Speed-loop PI switching
F13.40 F13.39 - 50.00Hz 15.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
frequency 2 of motor 2
Speed-loop integral limitation
F13.41 0.0 - 200.0% (F13.03) 180.0% 0.1% ○
of motor 2
0.00 - 1.00s
Speed-loop differential time
F13.42 0.0: There is not the speed-loop 0.00s 0.01s ○
of motor 2
differential
0.000 - 1.000s
Speed-loop output filter time
F13.43 0.000s 0.001s ○
of motor 2
0.000: The speed-loop filter is
disabled
B
0: Do not lock
Motor 2 torque limit lock
F13.44 1: All of the torque limit is same 0 1 ×
selection
with FWD electric torque limit
Unit: Forward rotation electric
torque limit channel
F13.45 Motor 2 Torque limit channel 00000 1 ×
Ten: Reverse electric torque
limit channel

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―143―

Appendix B Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
Hundreds: Forward rotation
torque limit channel
Thousands: Reverse rotation
torque limit channel

0: Number limit
1: Analog input limit
2: Terminal pulse limit
3 - 6: AI1 - AI4 limit
7: Keypad potentiometer is
limited
Motor torque limitation when 0.0 - 200.0% (motor rated
F13.46 180.0% 0.1% ○
motor 2 is forward current)
Motor torque limitation when 0.0 - 200.0% (motor rated
F13.47 180.0% 0.1% ○
motor 2 is reverse current)
Recreated torque limitation 0.0 - 200.0% (motor rated
F13.48 180.0% 0.1% ○
when motor 2 is forward current)
Recreated torque limitation 0.0 - 200.0% (motor rated
F13.49 180.0% 0.1% ○
when motor 2 is reverse current)
F13.50 Motor 2 current loop KP 1 - 2000 400 1 ○
F13.51 Motor 2 current loop KI 1 - 1000 200 1 ○
Motor 2 current loop output
F13.52 0 - 31 3 1 ○
filter times
Motor 2 core saturation
F13.53 0.00 - 1.00 1.00 0.01 ×
coefficient 4
Motor 2 core saturation
F13.54 0.00 - 1.00 1.00 0.01 ×
coefficient 5
Motor 2 current loop 0: Feedforward is prohibited
F13.55 1 1 ×
feedforward enabled 1: Enable feedforward
Motor 2 excitation boost
F13.56 0.0 - 30.0% 0.0% 0.1% ×
setting
Unit: Field orientation angle
correction enable
0: Field orientation correction is
forbidden
1: Enables magnetic field
orientation correction
Motor 2 field orientation
F13.57 00 1 ×
optimization setting
Ten: Mutual inductance
projections enabled
0: Disable mutual inductance
based on flux calculation
1: Enable mutual inductance
based on flux calculation
Motor 2 energy start
F13.58 0.00 - 50.00Hz 25.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
frequency
F13.59 Motor 2 energy switching 0.0 - 100.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○

―144― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix B Parameters
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
point
Motor 2 energy saving
F13.60 0 - 5000 times 10 times 1 times ○
detecting times
Motor 2 energy voltage
F13.61 40 - 4000ms 100ms 1ms ○
recovery time
Motor 2 energy voltage
F13.62 40 - 4000ms 100ms 1ms ○
decreasing time
F15: Digital I/O Terminal Parameters (refer to pages 75 - 87)
0: Unused
1: Inverter enabled
2: FWD function
3: REV function
F15.00 DI1l function 4: Three-wire operation mode 2 1 ×
5,6,7: Frequency source
selection 1, 2, 3
8: The frequency source switch
to analogue setting
9,10: Run command source
selection 1,2
11: Switch to terminal control
mode
12: External stop command
F15.01 DI2 function input 3 1 ×
13 - 16: Multi-step frequency
terminal 1 - 4
17: Frequency ramp (UP)
18: Frequency ramp (DN)
19: Clearing auxiliary frequency
setting
20,21: Command control input
for forward / reverse jog 1
(JOGF1/ JOGR1)
F15.02 DI3 function 22,23: Command control input 0 1 ×
for forward / reverse jog 2
(JOGF2/ JOGR2)
24: Jog 1 command control
input
25: Jog 1 direction control input
Remark: When select 20 and 21,
the functions 24 and 25 are
invalid
B
26: Acc. / Dec. time selection
F15.03 DI4 function terminals 1 0 1 ×
27: Acc. / Dec. time selection
terminals 2
28: Acc. / Dec. mode selection
29: Acc. / Dec. prohibition

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―145―

Appendix B Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
30: Switch to ordinary running
mode
31: Reset the stop status of PLC
operation
32: Pausing the process PID ×
F15.04 DI5 function 0 1
33: Disabling the process PID
34: Holding PID integral
35: Clearing PID integral
36: Switch to wobble operation
37: Reset the wobble operating
status
38: DC braking start while
stopping
39: External pause signal
F15.05 DI6 function (normally-open input) 0 1 ×
40: External pause signal
(normally-closed input)
41: Coast to stop
(normally-open input)
42: Coast to stop
(normally-closed input)
43: Emergency stop
44: External fault signal
(normally-open input)
F15.06 DI7 (option terminal) function 45: External fault signal 0 1 ×
(normally-closed input)
46: External reset (RST) input
47: Switch between motor 1 and
motor 2
48: Timing function input
49: Clearing the length
50: Clearing the counter to zero
51: Counter’s triggering signal
input
F15.07 DI8 (option terminal) function 52: Length counting input (only 0 1 ×
DI6)
53: Pulse frequency input (only
DI6)
54: Main and auxiliary frequency
source switching
56: Speed control / torque
control switching
57: Torque control torque
polarity switching
F15.08 DI9 (option terminal) function 59: PID parameter switch 0 1 ×

85: Pausing PLC operation

86: Terminal stop DC braking
87: Frequency setting channel
selection 4

―146― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix B Parameters
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
Acc. / Dec. rate of UP/DN
F15.12 0.00 - 99.99Hz/s 1.00Hz/s 0.01Hz/s ×
terminal
0: 2ms
F15.13 Terminal detecting interval 1: 4ms 0 1 ○
2: 8ms
Terminal detecting filter
F15.14 0 - 10000 2 1 ○
number
Bit0 - Bit8 is corresponding to
DI1 - DI9
Bitx: DIy terminal input positive
and negative logic
Terminal input positive and
F15.15 0: Positive logic 000 1 ○
negative logic setting
1: Negative logic

Only Only when using HD30-EIO

will DI7 - DI9 be enabled.
0: Two-wire operation mode 1
1: Two-wire operation mode 2
F15.16 FWD/REV operation mode 0 1 ×
2: Three-wire operation mode 1
3: Three-wire operation mode 2
0: Coast to stop
Terminal operating selection
1: Emergency stop
F15.17 due to fault of external 0 1 ×
2: Decelerate to stop
equipment
3: Continue to run
0: Unused
1: Inverter ready
2: Inverter is running (RUN)

F15.18 DO1 function 3: Inverter is forward running 2 1 ○

4: Inverter is reverse running
5: Inverter is DC braking
6: Inverter is in zero-frequency
status
7: Inverter is in zero-frequency
running
9,10: Frequency detection
threshold (FDT1,FDT2) ○
F15.19 DO2 function 0 1
11: Frequency arriving signal
(FAR)
12: Limitation of upper limit of
frequency
B
13: Limitation of lower limit of
frequency
14: Limitation of upper/lower
limits of wobble frequency
F15.20 RLY1 function 31 1 ○
15: Simple PLC operating status
indication
16: Simple PLC pausing
indication

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―147―

Appendix B Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting

17: Simple PLC cycle completion

indication
18: Completion of simple PLC
operation stages
RLY2 (extension relay)
F15.21 19: Completion of simple PLC 0 1 ○
function
operation
20: Output data from SCI
communication
21: Preset operating time out
22: Timing function output
23: Preset counting value reach
24: Indicating counting value
reach
RLY3 (extension relay) 25: Setting length arrive
F15.22 0 1 ○
function 26: Indication of motor 1 and
motor 2
27: Analog input overrun output
29: Undervoltage lock-up signal
(LU)
30: Overload signal (OL)
31: Inverter fault
32: External fault
33: Inverter auto-reset fault
RLY4 (extension relay)
F15.23 35: Dormancy instruction 0 1 ○
function
function
36: The system is running
38: High-frequency output (only
DO2)

Bit0 - Bit2 is corresponding to

DO1 - DO2
Bit2 - Bit5 is corresponding to
RLY1 - RLY4
Bitx: DOy and RLYy terminals
Output terminal positive and output positive and negative
F15.24 000 1 ○
negative logic selection logic
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic

Only when using HD30-EIO will

RLY2 - RLY4 be enabled
ON side delay time of timing
F15.25 0.00 - 300.00s 0.00s 0.01s ○
function
OFF side delay time of timing
F15.26 0.00 - 300.00s 0.00s 0.01s ○
function
F15.27 FAR range 0.00 - 100.00Hz 2.50Hz 0.01Hz ○
Zero-frequency operation
F15.28 0.00 - upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
threshold

―148― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix B Parameters
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
F15.29 Zero-frequency hysteresis 0.00 - upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
0: Detect according to the
reference frequency
F15.30 FDT1 detection mode 0 1 ○
1: Detect according to the
output frequency
F15.31 FDT1 level 0.00 - upper limit 50.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
F15.32 FDT1 lag 0.00 - upper limit 1.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
0: Detect according to the
reference frequency
F15.33 FDT2 detection mode 0 1 ○
1: Detect according to the
output frequency
F15.34 FDT2 level 0.00 - F00.06 50.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
F15.35 FDT2 lag 0.00 - F00.06 1.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
0 - 65535h
F15.36 Preset operating time 0: Preset operating time is 0h 1h ○
disabled
F15.37 Preset counting value arriving F15.38 - 9999 0 1 ○
Specified counting value
F15.38 0 - F15.37 0 1 ○
arriving
Unit: action drive when the
input exceeds the limit
0: Free stop
1: Emergency shutdown
2: Deceleration stop
3: No action

Ten: Select the analog input

port
0: No analog port
1: Operation panel
potentiometer
Ananlogue input 2: AI1 port
F15.39 0000 1 ×
over-limitation selection 3: AI2 port

Hundreds: Analog overrun

detection conditions
0: Always detected
1: Run command is detected
B
Thousands : Automatical
selection when analog overrun
is detected
0: Do not allow automatic
operation
1: Allows automatic operation
Analog input overrun upper
F15.40 F15.41 - 100.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
limit

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―149―

Appendix B Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
Analog input overrun down
F15.41 0.0% - F15.40 0.0% 0.1% ○
limit
Analog overrun detection
F15.42 0.00 - 50.00s 5.00s 0.01s ○
time
F15.43 Terminal output delay 0.0 - 100.0s 0.0s 0.1s ○
Start analog overrun
F15.44 0.00 - 50.00s 15.00s 0.01s ○
detection time
F16: Analogue I/O Terminal Parameters (refer to pages 87 - 91)
0: Unused
1: Upper limit frequency setting
Display panel with source
F16.00 potentiometer function 2: Frequency setting source 0 1 ×
selection 3: Auxiliary frequency reference
4: Process PID reference
5: Process PID feedback
6: Process PID regulating upper
limit
7: Process PID regulating lower
F16.01 AI1 function 2 1 ×
limit
8: Motor overheating signal
input
9: Motor 1 forward rotation
torque limit
10: Motor 1 reverse electric
torque limit ×
F16.02 AI2 function 5 1
11: Motor 1 forward
regeneration rotation torque
limit
12: Motor 1 reverse
regeneration rotation torque
limit
F16.03 AI3 function 13: Torque command given 0 1 ×
15: Torque control up limit
frequency
16: Motor 2 Forward rotation
electrical torque limit
17: Motor 2 reverse rotation
electrical torque limit
F16.04 AI4 function 18: Motor 2 Forward 0 1 ×
regeneration torque limit
19: Motor 2 reverse
regeneration torque limit
F16.05 AI1 bias -100.0 - 100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
F16.08 AI2 bias -100.0 - 100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
F16.11 AI3 bias -100.0 - 100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
F16.14 AI4 bias -100.0 - 100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
F16.06 AI1 gain -10.00 - 10.00 1.00 0.01 ○

―150― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix B Parameters
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
F16.09 AI2 gain -10.00 - 10.00 1.00 0.01 ○
F16.12 AI3 gain -10.00 - 10.00 1.00 0.01 ○
F16.15 AI4 gain -10.00 - 10.00 1.00 0.01 ○
F16.07 AI1 filtering time 0.01 - 10.00s 0.05s 0.01s ○
F16.10 AI2 filtering time 0.01 - 10.00s 0.05s 0.01s ○
F16.13 AI3 filtering time 0.01 - 10.00s 0.05s 0.01s ○
F16.16 AI4 filtering time 0.01 - 10.00s 0.05s 0.01s ○
Maximum input pulse
F16.17 0.0 - 50.0kHz 10.0kHz 0.1kHz ○
frequency
F16.18 Input pulse filtering time 0 - 500ms 10ms 1ms ○
0: Unused
1: Output frequency (0 - max.
output frequency)
2: Reference frquency (0 - max.
output frequency)
3: Motor speed (0 - maximum ○
F16.19 AO1 function 2 1
output frequency
corresponding to speed)
4: Output current (0 - twice
motor’s rated current)
5: Output current (0 - twice
motor’s rated current)
6: Torque command(0 - 3times
motor rated torque)
10: Output torque (0 - 3 times
motor’s rated torque)
11: Output voltage (0 - 1.2 times
inverter’s rated voltage)
F16.20 AO2 function 0 1 ○
12: Bus voltage (0 - 2.2 times
inverter’s rated voltage)
13: Output power (0 - twice
motor’s rated power)
14: AI1 input (0 - 10V)
15: AI2 input (-10 - 10V / 0 -
20mA)
16: AI3 input (-10 - 10V / 0 -
20mA)
17: AI4 input (-10 - 10V / 0 -
20mA)
18: Output frequency (-1 times -
B
High-speed pulse output
F16.21 1 times maximum output 0 1 ○
function
frequency)
19: Reference frequency (-1
times - 1 times maximum
output frequency)
20: Set frequency (0 - max.
output frequency)
F16.22 Analogue output AO1 bias -100.0 - 100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―151―

Appendix B Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
F16.23 Analogue output AO1 gain 0.0 - 200.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
F16.24 Analogue output AO2 bias -100.0 - 100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
F16.25 Analogue output AO2 gain 0.0 - 200.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
DO2 maximum output pulse
F16.26 0.1 - 50.0kHz 10.0kHz 0.1kHz ○
frequency
F16.27 Keypad potentiometer offset -100.0 - 100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
F16.28 Keypad potentiometer gain 0.00 - 10.00 1.00 0.01 ○
F17: SCI Communication Parameters (refer to pages 91 - 92)
0: 1-8-2 format, no parity, RTU
1: 1-8-1 format, even parity,RTU
F17.00 Data format 0 1 ×
2: 1-8-1 format, odd parity, RTU
6: 1-8-11 format, no parity, RTU
0: 1200bps
1: 2400bps
2: 4800bps
3: 9600bps
F17.01 Baud rate selection 4: 19200bps 3 1 ×
5: 38400bps
6: 57600bps
7: 76800bps
8: 115200bps
F17.02 Local address 0 - 247 2 1 ×
F17.03 Host PC response time 0 - 1000ms 1s 1ms ×
0.0 - 600.0s
Time threshold for detecting
F17.04 0.0: It will not detect 0.0s 0.1s ×
communication status
communication time out
0.0 - 600.0s
Detecting time at
F17.05 0.0: Itwill not detect the 0.0s 0.1s ×
communication error
communication error
Action selection at
F17.06 3 1 ×
communication time out
0: Coast to stop
Action selection at
F17.07 1: Emergency stop 3 1 ×
communication fault
2: Decelerate to stop
Action selection at
3: Continue to run
F17.08 communication peripheral 1 1 ×
device fault
Unit: Except of F00.13, F19.03,
EEPROM storeage selection in
communication
0: Not stored in EEPROM
Communication write
1: Stored in EEPROM
F17.09 function parameter of storage 01 1 ×
EEPROM method selection
Ten: For F00.13, F19.03, EEPROM
storeage selection in
communication
0: Not stored in EEPROM

―152― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix B Parameters
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
1: Stored in EEPROM
0.0 - 600.0s
Detecting time of network
F17.10 0.0: The communication timeout 0.0s 0.1s ×
communicaiton overtime
is not detected
F18: Display Control Parameters (refer to pages 92 - 93)
0: Chinese
F18.00 Language selection 0 1 ○
1: English
Displaying contrast of the LCD
F18.01 1 - 10 5 1 ○
keypad

0: Unused
Set the display parameter 1 1: Inverter’s rated current
F18.02 8 1 ○
during operation 3: Inverter status
4: Master setting frequency
source
Set the display parameter 2 5: Master setting frequency
F18.03 7 1 ○
during operation 6: Auxiliary setting frequency
7: Setting frequency
8: Reference frequency (after
Acc. / Dec.)
Set the display parameter 3
F18.04 9: Output frequency 9 1 ○
during operation
10: Setting speed
11: Running speed
13: Output voltage
Set the display parameter 4 14: Output current
F18.05 13 1 ○
during operation
15: Torque given
16: Output torque
17: Output power
Set the display parameter 5 18: DC bus voltage
F18.06 14 1 ○
during operation 19: Potentiometer input voltage
20: AI1 input voltage
21: AI1 input voltage (after
disposal)
Set the display parameter 6
F18.07 22: AI2 input voltage 18 1 ○
during operation
23: AI2 input voltage (after
disposal)
24: AI3 input voltage
Set the display parameter 1 at
F18.08 25: AI3 input voltage (after 7 1 ○
stop
disposal)
26: AI4 input voltage B
27: AI4 input voltage (after
Set the display parameter 2 at disposal)
F18.09 18 1 ○
stop 28: DI6 terminal pulse input
frequency
29: AO1 output
Set the display parameter 3 at 30: AO2 output
F18.10 20 1 ○
stop 31: High-speed output pulse
frequency

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―153―

Appendix B Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
32: Heatsink temperature
33: Set the line speed
Set the display parameter 4 at 34: Reference line speed
F18.11 22 1 ○
stop 37: Process PID reference
38: Process PID feedback
39: Process PID error
40: Process PID integral value
41: Process PID output
Set the display parameter 5 at 42: External couting value
F18.12 43 1 ○
stop 43: Input terminal status
44: Output terminal status
45: MODBUS communication
status
46: Actual length
Set the display parameter 6 at 47: Total length
F18.13 44 1 ○
stop 48: Total time at power on
(hour)
49: Total time at running (hour)
F18.14 Frequency display gain 0.1 - 160.0 1.0 0.1 ○

F18.15 Maximum line speed 0 - 65535 1000 1 ○

0: Integer
1: One decimal
F18.16 Line speed display accuracy 0 1 ○
2: Two decimal
3: Three decimal
F19: Function-boost Parameters (refer to pages 93 - 101)
0: No auxiliary source
1: Digital setting 1 (the initial
value is set by F19.03 and
adjusted by and keys
on the keypad)
2: Digital setting 2 (the initial
value is set by F19.03 and
Auxiliary frequency setting adjusted by terminals UP/DN)
F19.00 0 1 ○
source selection 3: Digital setting 3 (the initial
value = 0, set by SCI direct
communication
4: AI analogue setting
5: Terminal pulse setting
6: Process PID output
7 - 10: AI1 - AI4
11: Keypad potentiometer
Units: Main and auxiliary
operations
Master/Auxiliary setting 0: Master setting + auxiliary
F19.01 10 1 ○
calculation setting
1: Master setting - auxiliary
setting

―154― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix B Parameters
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting

Tens: Frequency source switch

selection
0: Main
1: Main and auxiliary operations
2: Main and auxiliary switching
3: Master and main auxiliary
operation switch
4: Auxiliary and main auxiliary
operation switch
Analogue auxiliary setting
F19.02 0.00 - 9.99 1.00 0.01 ○
coefficient
Initial value of digital auxiliary
F19.03 0.00 - F00.06 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
frequency
Units: Save selection at power
outage (Only when F19.00 = 1
or 2 will F19.04 be enabled)
0: Not save auxiliary frequency
at power outage
1: The auxiliary frequency will
be saved to F19.03 at power
Control selection of digital outage
F19.04 00 1 ○
auxiliary frequency
Tens: Frequency disposal when
the inverter stops
0: Maintain the auxiliary
frequency when the inverter
stops
1: The auxiliary frequency clears
to zero when the inverter stops
0: No adjustment
1: To adjust as per the max.
Adjustment selection of
F19.05 output frequency 1 1 ○
setting frequency
2: To adjust as per the current
frequency
Adjustment coefficient of
F19.06 0.0 - 200.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
setting frequency
0: Auto stop mode
Control selection of cooling 1: Immediate stop mode
F19.07 0 1 ○
fan 2: The fan runs continuously
when power on
B
Cooling fan controls delaying
F19.08 0.0 - 600.0s 60.0s 0.1s ○
time
F19.10 Zero-frequency threshold 0.00 - upper limit 1.00 Hz 0.01Hz ○
0: Run according to frequency
Action selection at setting
command
F19.11 frequency is lower than 0 1 ×
1: Holding stop, no output
zero-frequency threshold
2: Run according to

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―155―

Appendix B Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
zero-frequency threshold
3: Run according to
zero-frequency
Trip-free selection at 0: This function is disabled
F19.12 0 1 ×
momentary power loss 1: This function is enabled
Dec. time at voltage
F19.13 0.1 - 6000.0s 5.0s 0.1s ○
compensation
Reference voltage of trip-free 220V inverter: 210 - 370V 248V
F19.15 operation at momentary 1V ×
power loss 380V inverter: 400 - 670V 430V

0: This function is disabled

F19.16 Restart after power failure 0 1 ×
1: This function is enabled
Delay time for restart after
F19.17 0.00 - 10.00s 2.00s 0.01s ○
power failure
0.000 - 1.000
F19.18 Overvoltage suppression gain 0.000: Overvoltage stall is 0.500 0.001 ○
prohibited
220V inverter: 350 - 400V 390V
F19.19 Stall overvoltage point 1V ○
380V inverter: 650 - 790V 690V
0.000 - 1.000
Auto current limiting
F19.20 0.000: The automatic current limit 0.500 0.001 ○
selection
is invalid
Auto current limiting G: 150.0%
F19.21 20.0 - 200.0% 0.1% ○
threshold P: 110.0%
Enabled mode of terminal run 0: Rise edge enabled mode
F19.23 0 1 ○
command 1: Level enabled mode
220V inverter: 330 - 400V 380V
F19.24 Action voltage of braking unit 1V ○
380V inverter: 630 - 750V 720V
0: Prohibited
F19.25 Flux brake enabled 0 1 ○
1: Enable
F19.26 Preset length 0 - 65535m 0m 1m ○
F19.27 Actual length 0 - 65535m 0m 1m *
F19.28 Length ratio 0.001 - 30.000 1.000 0.001 ○
F19.29 Length checking coefficient 0.001 - 1.000 1.000 0.001 ○
F19.30 Measuring shaft diameter 1.00 - 100.00cm 10.00cm 0.01cm ○
Number of pulses per
F19.31 1 - 9999 1 1 ○
revolution
Length arrive and output 0: Output level signal
F19.32 0 1 ○
function selection 1: Output 500ms pulse
Record of length disposal 0: Auto-clear
F19.33 0 1 ○
after length arrive 1: No change
Record of length disposal at 0: Auto-clear
F19.34 0 1 ○
stop 1: No change
F19.35 Auxiliary PID output limit 0.0 - 100.0% 100.0% 0.1% ×

―156― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix B Parameters
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
Auxiliary PID output limit
F19.36 0.0 - 100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ×
increase
Unit : The main frequency
calculation range
0: 0 to maximum frequency
1: Negative maximum
frequency to maximum
frequency

Ten: Auxiliary frequency

calculation range
Frequency adjust range 0: 0 to maximum frequency
F19.37 100 1 ○
selection 1: Negative maximum
frequency to maximum
frequency

Hundreds: Synthetic frequency

calculation range
0: 0 to the upper limit frequency
1: Negative upper limit
frequency to upper limit
frequency
Phase short circuit detection 0: No detection
F19.38 1 1 ○
action selection 1: Detection
0: 380 - 460V
F19.39 Input voltage selection 1: 260 - 460V 0 1 ×
2: 200 - 460V
F19.40 Flux brake PI regulator Kp 0 - 4000 1000 1 ○
F19.41 Flux brake PI regulator Ki 0 - 500 20 1 ○
F20: Protection of Fault Parameters (refer to pages 101 - 105)
Units: Overload pre-alarm
detection
0: It is active all the time in
running status
1: It is active only at constant
speed

Tens: Action selection for

overload pre-alarm
○
F20.00 Overload pre-alarm detection
0: The inverter doesn’t alarm
00000 1
B
and continues operation when
detecting an active overload
signal
1: The inverter alarms and stops
operation when detecting an
active overload signal

Hundreds: Overload threshold

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―157―

Appendix B Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
selection
0: Ratio of load current to the
motor’s rated current (alarm:
motor overload)
1: Ratio of load current to the
inverter’s rated current (alarm:
inverter overload)

Thousands: Motor type

selection
0: Standard motor
1: Variable frequency

Ten thousands: Overload

protection
0: Overload protection is
enabled
1: Overload protection is
disabled
2 : Shielded inverter overload
protection, enable motor
overload protection
3: Shielded inverter overload
protection, motor overload
protection
Overload pre-alarm detection
F20.01 20.0 - 200.0% 150.0% 0.1% ○
threshold
Overload pre-alarm detection
F20.02 0.0 - 60.0s 5.0s 0.1s ○
time
0: Disabled
1: It is detecting all the time in
running process, and then
continues operation after
detecting (alarm)
2: It detectes only at the same
speed, and then continues
Inverter output load-loss operation after detecting
F20.03 0 1 ○
detection (alarm)
3: It is detecting all the time in
running process, and then cut
off the output after detecting
(fault)
4: It is detectes only at the same
speed, and then cut off the
output after detecting (fault)
Inverter output load-loss
F20.04 0 - 100% 30% 1% ○
detection threshold
Inverter output load-loss
F20.05 0.00 - 20.00s 1.00s 0.01s ○
detection time

―158― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix B Parameters
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
0: Does not detect the motor
Motor overheating signal overheating.
F20.06 0 1 ○
input type 1: Positive charateristic (PTC)
2: Negative charateristic (NTC)
Thermistor value at motor
F20.07 0.0 - 10.0kΩ 5.0kΩ 0.1kΩ ○
overheating
0 - 80%
Input phase loss detection
F20.08 0%: The inverter will not detect 30% 1% ○
reference
input phase loss fault
Input phase loss detection
F20.09 1.00 - 5.00s 1.00s 0.01s ○
time
0 - 100%
Output phase loss detection
F20.10 0%: The inverter will not detect 20% 1% ○
reference
output phase loss fault
Output phase loss detection
F20.11 1.00 - 20.00s 3.00s 0.01s ○
time
0 - 100%
PID reference lose detected
F20.12 0%: Does not detect PID reference 0% 1% ○
value
lose
0.00 - 10.00s
PID reference loss detection
F20.13 0.00s: Does not detect PID 0.20s 0.01s ○
time
reference loss
0 - 100%
PID feedback loss detected
F20.14 0%: Does not detect PID feedback 0% 1% ○
value
loss
0.00 - 10.00s
PID feedback loss detection
F20.15 0.00s: Does not detect PID 0.20s 0.01s ○
time
feedback loss
0 - 100%
Detection value at PID
F20.16 100%: Does not detect PID 100% 1% ○
feedback out of the limit
feedback out of the limit
0.00 - 10.00s
Detection time at PID
F20.17 0.00s: Does not detect PID 0.20s 0.01s ○
feedback out of the limit
feedback out of the limit
0 - 100
F20.18 Auto reset times 0 1 ○
0: No auto reset function
0.01s/tim
F20.19 Auto reset interval 0.01 - 200.00s/time 5.00s/time ○
e
Units: In auto reset process
B
0: Faulted relay doesn’t act
1: Faulted relay acts

F20.20 Faulted relay action selection 00 1 ○

Tens: In the undervoltage
process
0: Faulted relay doesn’t act
1: Faulted relay acts

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―159―

Appendix B Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
E0001: Acc. overcurrent
E0002: Dec. overcurrent
E0003: Costant overcurrent
E0004: Acc. overvoltage
E0005: Dec. overvoltage
E0006: Constant overvoltage
E0007: Stall overvoltage
E0008: Fault of power module
E0009: Heatsink overheat
E0010: Fault of braking unit
E0011: CPUfault
E0012: Parameters auto-tuning
fault
E0013: Contactor is not
actuated
E0014: Fault of current
detection circuit
E0015: Fault of input phase
E0016: Fault of output phase
Type of fifth latest (the last) E0017: Inverter overload
F20.21 0 1 *
fault E0018: Inverter output is
unloaded
E0019: Motor overload
E0020: Motor overheat
E0021: Access fault of control
board EEPROM
E0022: Access fault of keypad
EEPROM (only displaying
without any protection)
E0023: Fault setting of
parameters
E0024: Fault of external
equipment
E0025: PID reference loss
E0026: PID feedback loss
E0027: PID feedback out of
limiting
E0028: SCI communication
time-out
E0029: SCI communication error
Setting frequency at the last
F20.22 0.00 - 400.00Hz 0Hz 0.01Hz *
fault
Running frequency at the last
F20.23 0.00 - 400.00Hz 0Hz 0.1Hz *
fault
F20.24 Bus voltage at the last fault 0 - 999V 0V 1V *
Output voltage at the last
F20.25 0 - 999V 0V 1V *
fault
F20.26 Output current at the last 7.5kW or above: actual value 0.0A 0.1A *

―160― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix B Parameters
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
fault 5.5kW or below: actual value 0.00A 0.01A
Input terminal status at the
F20.27 0 - 0x1FF 0 1 *
last fault
Output terminal status at the
F20.28 0 - 0x7FF 0 1 *
last fault
F20.29 Interval of fifth latest fault 0 - 6553.5 hours 0.0 0.1h *
F20.30 Type of fourth latest fault 0 - 99 0 1 *
F20.31 Interval of fourth latest fault 0.0 - 6553.5 hours 0.0 0.1h *
F20.32 Type of third latest fault 0 - 99 0 1 *
F20.33 Interval of third latest fault 0.0 - 6553.5 hours 0.0 0.1h *
F20.34 Type of second latest fault 0 - 99 0 1 *
F20.35 Interval of second latest fault 0.0 - 6553.5 hours 0.0 0.1h *
F20.36 Type of first latest fault 0 - 99 0 1 *
F20.37 Interval of first latest fault 0.0 - 6553.5 hours 0.0 0.1h *
F20.38 Last fault interval 0.0 - 6553.5 hours 0.0 0.1h *
F21: Torque Control Parameters (refer to pages 105 -106)
0: F21.01 digital set
Torque command given 1: Analogue set
F21.00 0 1 ×
channel selection 2: Terminals pulse set
3: SCI communicaiton set
Torque command digital
F21.01 -100.0 - 100.0 % (F21.02) 0.0% 0.1% ○
setting
F21.02 Max. Torque setting 0.0 - 500.0% (F08.04) 100.0% 0.1% ×
Filter time of torque
F21.03 0.000 - 1.000s 0.000s 0.001s ○
command
0: Defined by F21.05, F21.06
Speed limit selection in 1: Defined by F00.06 (max.
F21.04 1 1 ×
torque control output frequency)
2: Limited by analog quantity
Positive speed limit selection
F21.05 0 - 100% (F00.06) 100% 1% ○
in torque control
Reverse speed limit selection
F21.06 0 - 100% (F00.06) 100% 1% ○
in torque control
0: Deceleration stop + DC
Stop mode selection of braking
F21.10 0 1 ×
torque control 1: Stop torque output
2: Free stop B
F23: PWM Control Parameters (refer to pages 106 - 106)
Depend
F23.00 Set the carrier frequency 1 - 16kHz 1kHz ×
on HD30
0: The carrier frequency is
disabled automatically
Carrier frequency is
F23.01 1: Carrier frequency auto 1 1 ×
automatically adjusted
adjustment 1
2: Carrier frequency automatic

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―161―

Appendix B Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
adjustment 2
0: Disabled
F23.02 PWM overshoot enable 1 1 ×
1: Enabled
0: Two-phase modulation or
three-phase modulation
F23.03 PWM modulation mode 0 1 ×
1: Three-phase modulation
2: Two-phase modulation
PWM Modulation mode Depend
F23.04 0.00 - 50.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
switching point1 on HD30
PWM Modulation mode Depend
F23.05 0.00 - 50.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
switching point2 on HD30
Random carrier frequency
F23.09 0 - 2000 2 1 ×
coefficient K1
Random carrier frequency
F23.10 0 - 2000 3 1 ×
coefficient K2
Group U: User Menu Mode Display Parameters (refer to parameters 106 - 107)
U00.00 User menu map of setting 1 00.01 0.01 ○
U00.02 User menu map of setting 2 00.06 0.01 ○
U00.04 User menu map of setting 3 00.08 0.01 ○
U00.06 User menu map of setting 4 00.13 0.01 ○
U00.08 User menu map of setting 5 00.10 0.01 ○
U00.10 User menu map of setting 6 00.11 0.01 ○
U00.12 User menu map of setting 7 02.13 0.01 ○
00.00 - 23.02, 99.99
U00.14 User menu map of setting 8 03.01 0.01 ○
99.99 is corresponding to no
U00.16 User menu map of setting 9 03.02 0.01 ○
parameter mapping function
U00.18 User menu map of setting 10 08.00 0.01 ○
U00.20 User menu map of setting 11 08.01 0.01 ○
U00.22 User menu map of setting 12 08.02 0.01 ○
U00.24 User menu map of setting 13 08.03 0.01 ○
U00.26 User menu map of setting 14 08.04 0.01 ○
U00.28 User menu map of setting 15 - 0.01 ○
U00.30 User menu map of setting 16 - 0.01 ○
U00.01 The setting value of map 1 - -
U00.03 The setting value of map 2 - -
U00.05 The setting value of map 3 - -
U00.07 The setting value of map 4 - -
U00.09 The setting value of map 5 - -
U00.11 The setting value of map 6 - - -
U00.13 The setting value of map 7 - -
U00.15 The setting value of map 8 - -
U00.17 The setting value of map 9 - -
U00.19 The setting value of map 10 - -
U00.21 The setting value of map 11 - -

―162― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix B Parameters
Ref. Code Function Setting Range Default Unit Attribute Setting
U00.23 The setting value of map 12 - -
U00.25 The setting value of map 13 - -
U00.27 The setting value of map 14 - -
U00.29 The setting value of map 15 - -
U00.31 The setting value of map 16 - -

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―163―

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix C Communication Protocol

Appendix C Communication Protocol

1. Introduction
HD30 series inverters provide one RS485 communication interface which uses the standard MODBUS
communication protocol.
By using the host computer (including communication devices such as computer and PLC) the user
can operate to read-write the inverter’s function code, read the status parameters and write the control
command etc. The inverter is in slave mode when it is communicating.
Communication Terminal
The communication terminal is shown in following table.
Type Name Terminal description
Pin Difinition
1,3 +5V
2 485+
1 8 SCI terminal
4,5,6 GND
RJ45
7 485-
8 Unused
Terminal description
A
Terminal A 485+
B B 485-

The transmitting mode is shown in following table.

Port Asyn, half-duplex
Format 1-8-2 (1 start bit, 8 data bits, 2 stop bits), no parity, RTU
Baut rate 9600bps
Relative setting Refe to F17: SCI Communication Parameters, on page 91

Network Mode

PC master PLC master PC master PLC master

RS232/RS485 RS485 RS232/RS485 RS485

switching module switching module

HD30 HD30 HD30 HD30 HD30

Single-master and multi-slave Single-master and single-slave C

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―165―

Appendix C Communication Protocol Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Protocol Format
The MODBUS protocol simultaneously supports RTU mode, with corresponding frame format as shown
below:
RTU model
Modbus data frame

Frame head (at least Slave Function Frame head (at least
Data Checking
3.5 character spacing) address code 3.5 character spacing)

MODBUS adopts “Big Endian” encoding mode, higher byte prior to lower byte at sending.
In the RTU mode
• The idle time of frame head and frame tail passing bus should be not less than 3.5 bytes.
• Slave address=0, it means broadcast address.
• Data checking relies on CRC-16. The whole information need be checked. The concrete CRC
checking is referred to the page 172.
For example: To read the slave internal register F00.08 = 50.00Hz of No. 1 address:
Command Address Parameter Register Address Read char no. Checksum
frame 0x01 0x03 0x00 0x08 0x00 0x01 0x05 0xC8
Response Address Parameter Response Byte Content of register Checksum
frame 0x01 0x03 0x02 0x13 0x88 0xB5 0x12

2. Scaling of Drive Transmitting Values

Except the parameters of the remarks, all other function codes can define the scaling relationship of
the specified function code via referring the manual’s minimum unit.
Remarks:
1. Communication data for F04.03, F21.01, F16.05, F16.08, F16.11, F16.14, F16.22, F16.24 0 - 2000
Corresponding data -1000 - +1000.
2. Status parameter 0x3318 communication data 0 - 16000 corresponds to data -8000 - +8000.
3. Status parameters: AI2 - AI4 input voltage, AI2 - AI4 input voltage (after processing), process PID reference,
process PID feedback, process PID error, process PID integral item and process PID output communication
data 0-2000 Corresponding data -1000 - + 1000.

3. Protocol Function
Supported function
MODBUS protocol supports the below parameter operation:
Supported function Code Instructions
To read function parameters and status parameter 0x03
To rewrite single function parameter or control 0x06 Saving or not is set by F17.09 in power failure
parameter 0x41 Not saved at power off
To rewrite numbers of function parameters or control 0x10 Saving or not is set by F17.09 in power failure
parameters 0x43 Saved at power off

―166― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix C Communication Protocol
To read function parameters and status parameter
Function code 0x03, command frame and response frame are in below table.
Command Starting register CRC/LRC
Address Code No. of register
frame address checking
Data frame
1 1 2 2 2/1
bytes
Value or range 0 - 247 0x03 0x0000 - 0xFFFF 0x0001 - 0x000C

Response CRC/LRC
Address Code Read byte no. Register content
frame checking
Data frame
1 1 1 2* no. of registers 2/1
bytes
Value or range 1 - 247 0x03 2* no. of registers

To rewrite single function parameter or control parameter

Function code 0x06 (saving or not is set by F17.09 in power failure) or 0x41 (not save at power off );
Command frame and response frame are in below table.
Command CRC/LRC
Address Code Register address Register content
frame checking
Data frame
1 1 2 2 2/1
bytes
Value or range 0 - 247 0x06, 0x41 0x0000 - 0xFFFF 0x0000 - 0xFFFF

Response CRC/LRC
Address Code Register address Register content
frame checking
Data frame
1 1 2 2 2/1
bytes
Value or range 1 - 247 0x06, 0x41 0x0000 - 0xFFFF 0x0000 - 0xFFFF

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―167―

Appendix C Communication Protocol Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
To rewrite numbers of function parameters or control parameters
Function code 0x06 (saving or not is set by F17.09 in power failure) or 0x43 (save at power off);
command frame and response frame are in below table.
Starting Byte no. of
Command No. of Register CRC /LRC
Address Code register register
frame register content checking
address content
2* no. of
Data frame
1 1 2 2 1 operation 2/1
bytes
registers
2* no. of
0x0000 - 0x0000 -
Value or range 0 - 247 0x10, 0x43 operation
0xFFFF 0x0004
registers

Response Starting register No. of operation

Address Code CRC checking
frame address registers
Data frame
1 1 2 2 2/1
bytes
Value or range 1 - 247 0x10, 0x43 0x0000 - 0xFFFF 0x0000 - 0x0004

This command rewrites the contents of continuous data unit from starting register address where is
mapped as function parameter and control parameter of controller, etc.
The inverter will start to save from low address to high address of the register when it continuously
saves many register parameters. The saving will return from the firstly failed address if the saving
process isn’t completely successful.
Fault and exception code
If the operation command fails, the response is fault code. The fault code is＋0x80. Below is the
instruction for the exception codes.
Exception code Instructions
0x01 Illegal function parameters.
0x02 Illegal register address.
0x03 Data fault. Data is exceeded the upper/lower limit.
0x04 Slave operation fails (including fault caused by data invalid).
Unsupported operation (unsupported to read the attributes, factory default and upper / lower
0x16
limit for the control parameter and status parameter).
0x17 The register number of command frame is fault.
0x18 Incorrect information frame, including incorrect information length and incorrect checking.
0x20 Parameters cannot be modified.
0x21 Parameters are unchangeable when the controller is in running status.
0x22 Parameters are protected by password.

―168― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix C Communication Protocol
4. Address Mapping
The function parameters, control parameters and status parameters are all mapped as MODBUS’s
read-write register.
Function code address mapping
Their Group numbers are mapped as higher bytes of register address while the relationships are shown
as below table.
The interGroup indexes are mapped as lower bytes. Please refer to user manual for index of F00 - F20
and U00.
High bytes of Group High bytes of Group High bytes of Group
register address number register address number register address number
0x00 F00 0x07 F07 0x10 F16
0x01 F01 0x08 F08 0x11 F17
0x02 F02 0x09 F09 0x12 F18
0x03 F03 0x0a F10 0x13 F19
0x04 F04 0x0b F11 0x14 F20
0x05 F05 0x0d F13 0x14 F21
0x06 F06 0x0f F15 0x17 F23
0x18 U00

For instance: The register address of function parameter F03.02 is 0x0302, and that of function
parameter F16.01 is 0x1001.
Control parameter (0x32) address mapping
The users can realize the inverter’s starting, stopping and running speed setting through the control
parameter, and obtain the inverter’s running frequency, output current, etc. through indexing the
inverter’s status parameters.
The status parameters (0x32) are mapped as higher bytes of the register address, and the inter Group
indexes are as following:
Register address Parameter name Retained or not at power loss
0x3200 Control command character No
Saving or not is set by hundreds bit
0x3201 Running frequency setting
of F00.14 in power failure
0x3202 Auxiliary running frequency setting No
0x3204 Virtual terminal control setting No

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―169―

Appendix C Communication Protocol Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
Definition of inverter control command words (0x3200):
Bit Value and definition Function description
0: Run command 1: Run command To control the inverter’s starting and stop (in
Bit0
disabled enabled edge triggering mode)
Running direction: have the same function as
Bit1 0: Forward 1: Reverse
terminal FWD / REV
1: Stop mode: Decelerate to stop the inverter (in edge
Bit2 0: Unused
Decelerate to stop triggering mode)
1: Stop mode: Emergency to stop the inverter (in edge
Bit3 0: Unused
emergency to stop triggering mode)
1: Stop mode: coast to Coast to stop the inverter (in edge triggering
Bit4 0: Unused
stop mode)
The inverter is displaying external fault, and will
1: Stop mode: external
Bit5 0: Unused stop in accordance with F17.08 setting mode or
fault
continue to run
Bit6 0: Jog forward stop 1: Jog forward run Jog forward control
Bit7 0: Jog reverse stop 1: Jog reverse run Jog reverse control
0: Fault reset
Bit8 1: Fault reset enabled Fault reset control
disabled
Bit9 - Bit11 0: Unused
0: Present control 1: Present control
Bit12 The present sending control word is valid
disa enabled
Bit13 - Bit15 0: Unused

The contents of the register can be defined as control commands as shown in the table below, ie the
control command word bit logic combination.
Register content Control command Register address Parameter name
0x1001 Forward running 0x1020 Stop due to external fault
0x1003 Reverse running 0x1040 Forward jog
0x1004 Decelerate to stop 0x1080 Reverse jog
0x1008 Emergency to stop 0x1100 Fault reset
0x1010 Coast to stop

Definition of virtual terminal control setting word (0x3204):

Bit Value and definition
Bit0 0: DO1 output is disabled 1: DO1 output is enabled
Bit1 0: DO2 output is disabled 1: DO2 output is enabled
Bit2 0: RLY1 output is disabled 1: RLY1 output is enabled
Bit3 0: RLY2 output is disabled 1: RLY2 output is enabled
Bit4 0: RLY3 output is disabled 1: RLY3 output is enabled
Bit5 0: RLY4 output is disabled 1: RLY4 output is enabled
Bit6 - Bit15 Unused Unused

―170― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix C Communication Protocol
Status parameter (0x33) address mapping
The status parameters (0x33) are mapped as higher bytes of the register address, and the interGroup
indexes are as following:
Address Function Address Function
0x3300 Controller series 0x331F AI3 voltage
0x3301 Software version of DSP 0x3320 AI3 voltage (after calculating)
0x3303 Special software version of DSP 0x3321 AI4 voltage
0x3305 Software version of keypad 0x3322 AI4 voltage (after calculating)
0x3306 Custom series No. 0x3323 DI6 terminal pulse input frequency
0x3307 Motor and control mode 0x3324 AO1 output
0x3308 Rated current of HD30 0x3325 AO2 output
0x330A Inverter status 0x3326 High-speed output pulse frequency
0x330B Master setting frequency source 0x3327 Heatsink temperature
0x330C Master setting frequency 0x332C Process PID reference
0x330D Auxiliary setting frequency 0x332D Process PID feedback
0x330E Setting frequency 0x332E Process PID error
0x330F Reference frquency (after Acc. / Dec.) 0x332F Process PID integral
0x3310 Output frequency 0x3330 Process PID output
0x3311 Setting Rpm 0x3331 External counting value
0x3312 Running Rpm 0x3332 Input terminal status
0x3314 Output voltage 0x3333 Output terminal status
0x3315 Output current 0x3334 MODBUS communication status
0x3316 Setting torque 0x3335 Actual length
0x3317 Output torque 0x3336 Total length
0x3318 Output power 0x3337 Total time at power on (hour)
0x3319 DC bus voltage 0x3338 Total time at running (hour)
0x331A Input voltage of keypad of potentiometer 0x3339 High byte of motor total energy
0x331B AI1 voltage 0x333A Low byte of motor total energy
0x331C AI1 voltage (after calculating) 0x333B High byte of this running energy
0x331D AI2 voltage 0x333C Low byte of this running energy
0x331E AI2 voltage (after calculating) 0x333D The present fault code

5. Special Instruction
1. Group F08 (Asynchronous motor 1 parameter setting), Group F12 (Unused), F13.00 - F13.15
(Asynchronous motor 2 parameter setting) and Group F17 (SCI communication parameters) are the
inverter parameter which can be read but cannot be modified by the host computer.
2. F01.00 (user password) cannot be set and adjusted through communication as well, but the user can
verify the user password by writing F01.00 and get access to adjust inverter function parameters on
C
the host. After adjustment, the user can close the permission by writing invalid password to F01.00.
3. If many multi-function input terminals are set the same function, it may cause dysfunction. Therefore,
the user should avoid this case when modify the multi-function terminal function via the MODBUS.

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―171―

Appendix C Communication Protocol Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
6. CRC Checking
Code of online calculating CRC is shown below:
unsigned int crc_check(unsigned char *data,unsigned char length)
{
int i;
unsigned crc_result=0xffff;
while(length--)
{
crc_result^=*data++;
for(i=0;i<8;i++)
{
if(crc_result&0x01)
crc_result=(crc_result>>1)^0xa001;
else
crc_result=crc_result>>1;
}
}
return (crc_result=((crc_result&0xff )<<8)|(crc_result>>8));
}

7. Application Case
Remarks: Please verify all the hardware equipments are connected well before controlling the inverter
via communication. In addition, please preset the communication data format, baud rate and
communication address.
1. To read the command frame of the maximum output frequency of slave 2 (to read F00.06), answer
50.00Hz.
Command Address Code Register address Word no. of read Checksum
frame 0x02 0x03 0x00 0x06 0x00 0x01 0x64 0x38
Response Address Code Answer byte Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x03 0x02 0x13 0x88 0XF1 0x12

2. To read the DC bus voltage of slave 2 (to read status parameter), answer 537V.
Command Address Code Register address Word no. of read Checksum
frame 0x02 0x03 0x33 0x19 0x00 0x01 0x5A 0xBA
Response Address Code Answer byte Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x03 0x02 0x02 0x19 0x3C 0xEE

―172― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd. Appendix C Communication Protocol
3. To read the setting frequency of slave 2 (set F00.13 to 45.00Hz).
Command Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x00 0x0D 0x11 0x94 0x15 0xC5
Response Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x00 0x0D 0x11 0x94 0x15 0xC5

4. When the frequency setting source F00.10 = 2, set the frequency value to 45.00Hz by writing the
register content 0x11, 0x94.
Command Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x01 0x11 0x94 0xDB 0x7E
Response Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x01 0x11 0x94 0xDB 0x7E

5. F00.11 = 2, give the reverse operation command to the address 2 of slave.

Command Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x03 0xCA 0x80
Response Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x03 0xCA 0x80

6. F00.11 = 2, give the Dec. stop command to the address 2 of slave.

Command Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x04 0x8B 0x42
Response Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x04 0x8B 0x42

7. F00.11 = 2, give the emergency stop command to the address 2 of slave.

Command Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x08 0x8B 0x42
Response Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x08 0x8B 0x42

8. F00.11 = 2, give the coast to stop command to the address 2 of slave.

Command Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x10 0x8B 0x4D
Response Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x10 0x8B 0x4D

9. External fault stop control of slave 2 via communication (E0024 fault).

Command Address Code Register address Register content Checksum C
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x20 0x8B 0x59
Response Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x20 0x8B 0x59

HD30 Series User Manual V1.2 ―173―

Appendix C Communication Protocol Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
10. Give the fault reset signal to the address 2 of slave.
Command Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x11 0x00 0x8B 0x11
Response Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
frame 0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x11 0x00 0x8B 0x11

―174― HD30 Series User Manual V1.2